Page 1 ‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ‬ E N G L I S H ‫ﻓﺎﺭﺳﯽ‬ ‫ﻓﺎﺭﺳﯽ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ‬ E N G L I S H ‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬ User Guide LG-P895 LG-P895 www.lg.com www.lg.com MFL67684824 (1.0) W MFL67684824 (1.0) W...
Page 3 .‫ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻤﺲ‬ .‫. ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺤﻘﻮﻕ ﻣﺤﻔﻮﻇﺔ‬ Copyright ©2012 LG Electronics, Inc • LG Group ‫ ﻫﻤﺎ ﻋﻼﻣﺘﺎﻥ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳﺘﺎﻥ ﻣﺴﺠﻠﺘﺎﻥ ﻟﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ‬LG ‫ ﻭﺷﻌﺎﺭ‬LG .‫ﻭﺍﻟﻜﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺑﻌﺔ. ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﺗﻌﻮﺩ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺎﻟﻜﻴﻬﺎ‬ YouTube™ ‫ ﻭ‬Gmail™ ‫ ﻭ‬Google Maps™ ‫ ﻭ‬Google™ •...
Page 4 ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ‬ 44 ..‫ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﻣﺆﺧﺮ ً ﺍ‬ 7 .......‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺁﻣﻦ ﻭﻓﻌﺎﻝ‬ 44 ........‫ﻧﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﺍﻹﺷﻌﺎﺭ‬ 18 ....‫ﺍﻟﺘﻌ ﺮ ّ ﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ‬ 45 ......‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ‬ 31 ........‫ﻣﻜﻮﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ‬ 48 ...... ‫ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬ 49 ......‫ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ...
Page 5 69 ..........‫ﺍﻻﺳﻤﺎء‬ 57 ......Wi-Fi ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﺚ‬ ‫ ﻟﻠﻤﺸﺎﺭﻛﺔ ﻋﺒﺮ‬Wi-Fi Direct ‫ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ‬ 69 ........‫ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ﺍﺳﻢ‬ 58 ........ SmartShare 69 ........‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ‬ 59 .......SmartShare ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬ 70 ......... ‫ﺍﻻﺳﻤﺎء ﺍﻟﻤﻔﻀﻠﺔ‬ ‫ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﻤﺎء ﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺎﺯﻙ ﺍﻟﻘﺪﻳﻢ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ‬ 64 ..........‫ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ‬ 70 ..........‫ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪ‬...
Page 6 ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ‬ 86 ........‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺳﺮﻳﻊ‬ 75 ........‫ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ-ﺍﻻﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ‬ 86 ........‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬ 75 ..... ‫ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺣﺴﺎﺏ ﺑﺮﻳﺪ ﺇﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ‬ 87 ..... ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻣﺔ‬ 76 ....‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺣﺴﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ‬ 88 ..‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬ 77 ....‫ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﻣﻊ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺤﺴﺎﺑﺎﺕ‬ 77 ....
Page 7 106 ..‫ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﻲ ﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻫﺎﺗﻔﻚ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ‬ 107 ... ‫ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻭﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﻲ‬ 100 ......LG SmartWorld 107 ....‫ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ‬ ‫ ﻣﻦ‬LG SmartWorld ‫ﻛﻴﻒ ﺗﺤﺼﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ 100 ........‫ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ‬ 110 ..........‫ﻭﻳﺐ‬ 101 ..LG SmartWorld ‫ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬...
Page 8 118 .........‫ﺷﺨﺼﻲ‬ 130 ....‫ﺍﺳﺘﻜﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻷﺧﻄﺎء ﻭﺇﺻﻼﺣﻬﺎ‬ 120 ........... ‫ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ‬ 122 ......‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‬ 124 ........DivX HD 125 ......... DTS 125 ......Dolby Mobile 126 ....LG ‫ ﻣﻦ‬On-Screen Phone 126 ..... On-Screen Phone ‫ﺭﻣﻮﺯ‬ 126 .... On-Screen Phone ‫ﻣﻴﺰﺍﺕ‬...
Page 9 .(SAR) ‫ﺍﻻﻣﺘﺼﺎﺹ ﺍﻟﻤﺤ ﺪ ّ ﺩ‬ ‫• ﻭﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﻏﻢ ﻣﻦ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺍﺧﺘﻼﻓﺎﺕ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ‬ ‫، ﻓﻬﻲ ﻛﻠﻬﺎ‬LG ‫ ﻟﻤﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻃﺮﺍﺯﺍﺕ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ‬SAR LG-P895 ‫ﻟﻘﺪ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺼﻤﻴﻢ ﻃﺮﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻮﻝ‬ ‫ﻣﺼﻤﻤﺔ ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﺗﻔﻲ ﺑﺎﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﻠﻘﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻌﺮ ّ ﺽ‬ ‫ﻫﺬﺍ ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﻳﻔﻲ ﺑﻤﺘﻄﻠﺒﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ‬...
Page 10 ‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺁﻣﻦ ﻭﻓﻌﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﻣﻌﺪﻥ ﻭﻳﺠﺐ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻌﺪ 5.1 ﺳﻢ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﺤﻮ ﻣﺘﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺇﻟﻰ 01 ﺟﺮﺍﻣﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﻴﺞ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﻗﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺠﺴﻢ. ﻭﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‬ .‫ﺍﻟﻌﻀﻮﻱ‬ ‫ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ، ﻳﺘﻄﻠ ّ ﺐ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻻ ً ﻧﻮﻋ ﻴ ّﺎ ً ﻋﺎﻟﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﻛﺜﺮ...
Page 11 ‫• ﻗﺪ ﺗﺘﻀﻤﻦ ﺍﻹﺻﻼﺣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻤﻮﻟﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻔﺎﻟﺔ، ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ً ﻟـ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﻳﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻭﺻﻴﺎﻧﺘﻪ‬ ‫، ﻟﻮﺣﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﻗﻄﻊ ﺍﻟﻐﻴﺎﺭ ﺳﻮﺍء ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﺓ ً ﺃﻭ‬LG ‫ﻣﺠﺪﺩ ﺓ ً ، ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺘﻤﺘﻊ ﺑﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻳﺔ ﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮ‬ .‫ﺍﻷﺟﺰﺍء ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻟﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ، ﻭﺍﻟﺸﻮﺍﺣﻦ، ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬...
Page 12 ‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺁﻣﻦ ﻭﻓﻌﺎﻝ‬ ‫• ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻗﻄﻌﺔ ﻗﻤﺎﺵ ﺟﺎﻓﺔ ﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫• ﺃﻭﻗﻒ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺣﻴﺜﻤﺎ ﺗﻄﺎﻟﺐ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺝ )ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻮﺍﺩ ﻣﺬﻳﺒﺔ ﻛﺎﻟﺒﻨﺰﻳﻦ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﻨﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﻧﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺬﻟﻚ. ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺎﻝ، ﻻ‬ .(‫ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻜﺤﻮﻝ‬ ‫ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺸﻔﻴﺎﺕ ﺇﺫ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺛﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫•...
Page 13 ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺸﻌﻮﺭ ﺑﺎﻟﺮﺍﺣﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺒﺐ‬ ‫• ﻻ ﺗﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺷﻲء ﺣﺎﺩ ﺇﺫ ﻗﺪ‬ ‫ﺑﺤﺮﻭﻕ ﻃﻔﻴﻔﺔ. ﻟﺬﺍ، ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺑﻌﻨﺎﻳﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء‬ .‫ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﻟﺤﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﺭ ﺑﺎﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‬ .‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺑﻌﺪﻩ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ‬ .‫• ﻻ ﺗﻌﺮ ّ ﺽ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻟﻠﺴﻮﺍﺋﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺮﻃﻮﺑﺔ‬ ‫•...
Page 14 ‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺁﻣﻦ ﻭﻓﻌﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺴﻼﻣﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻗﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻓ ﻌ ّ ﺎﻝ ﻟﻠﻬﺎﺗﻒ‬ ‫ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﻧﻴﻦ ﻭﺍﻷﻧﻈﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﻠﻘﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍﺗﻒ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴﺔ‬ .‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻮﻟﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺩﺓ‬ ‫ﻗﺪ ﺗﺘﻌﺮ ّ ﺽ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻮﻟﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺸﻮﻳﺶ، ﻣﻤﺎ ﻗﺪ‬ .‫• ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻫﺎﺗﻔﺎ ً ﻣﺤﻤﻮﻻ ً ﺑﺎﻟﻴﺪ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺩﺓ‬ .‫ﻳﺆﺛﺮ...
Page 15 .‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﻣﻌﻘﻮﻝ‬ ‫ﺃﻭ ﻣﺤﻤﻮﻟﺔ. ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺒﻄﻞ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻋﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﻴﺲ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍﺋﻲ ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺑﺈﺻﺎﺑﺎﺕ ﺧﻄﻴﺮﺓ ﺑﺴﺒﺐ ﺃﺩﺍء ﻏﻴﺮ‬ ‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺱ، ﺍﺧﻔﺾ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ‬ .‫ﺻﺤﻴﺢ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﻻ ﺗﺴﻤﻊ ﺍﻷﺷﺨﺎﺹ ﺍﻟﺬﻳﻦ ﻳﺘﺤﺪﺛﻮﻥ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺮﺏ ﻣﻨﻚ ﺃﻭ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﻤﻜ ﱡ ﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺺ ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻟﺲ‬ ‫•...
Page 16 ‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺁﻣﻦ ﻭﻓﻌﺎﻝ‬ ‫• ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﻨﻘﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﻏﺎﺯ ﺃﻭ ﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﻟﻼﺷﺘﻌﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﺃﻭ ﺗﺤﺎﻭﻝ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺘﻪ. ﺗﻮﻗﻒ ﻋﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻮﻝ‬ ‫ﺃﻭ ﻣﺘﻔﺠﺮﺍﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺠﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﺎﺭﺓ ﻧﻔﺴﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺤﺘﻮﻱ‬ .‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﺰﺟﺎﺝ ﻣﻦ ﻗ ِ ﺒﻞ ﻣﻮﻓﺮ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﻣﻌﺘﻤﺪ‬ .‫ﻋﻠﻰ...
Page 17 ‫ﻟﻴﺲ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﻟﻠﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺷﺄﻧﻪ ﺗﺨﻔﻴﺾ ﺃﺩﺍء‬ .‫ﻭﺗﺘﺴ ﺒ ّﺐ ﺑﺎﻻﺧﺘﻨﺎﻕ‬ .‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﻮﺍﺭﺉ‬ LG ‫ ﻓﻘﻂ. ﻓﺸﻮﺍﺣﻦ‬LG ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﻭﺷﻮﺍﺣﻦ‬ • ‫ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﻮﺍﺭﺉ ﻣﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﺓ ً ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ‬ .‫ﻣﺼ ﻤ ّ ﻤﺔ ﻹﻃﺎﻟﺔ ﻓﺘﺮﺓ ﻋﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬...
Page 18 ‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺁﻣﻦ ﻭﻓﻌﺎﻝ‬ ‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺑﺤﺎﺟﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ، ﺧﺬﻫﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ‬ ‫• ﺃﻋﺪ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻝ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ‬ LG ‫ﺃﻗﺮﺏ ﻓﺮﻉ ﻟﻠﺼﻴﺎﻧﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻭﻛﻴﻞ ﻣﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﻣﻦ‬ .‫ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﻟﺰﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﻓﺘﺮﺓ ﺻﻼﺣﻴﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ‬ .‫ ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻋﺪﺓ‬Electronics ‫•...
Page 19 ،(‫ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ: 05 + ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻣﺌﻮﻳﺔ )ﺗﻔﺮﻳﻎ‬ ‫ ﺑﻤﻮﺟﺐ ﻫﺬﺍ‬LG Electronics ‫ﺗﻌﻠﻦ ﺷﺮﻛﺔ‬ (‫54+ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻣﺌﻮﻳﺔ )ﺷﺤﻦ‬ ‫ ﻳﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻄﻠﺒﺎﺕ‬LG-P895 ‫ﺍﻹﺷﻌﺎﺭ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻷﺣﻜﺎﻡ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻠﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻮﺟﻴﻪ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﺩﻧﻰ: 01- ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﻣﺌﻮﻳﺔ‬ ‫. ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﺜﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﺴﺨﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺇﻋﻼﻥ‬EC/1999/5 ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ...
Page 20 ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻌ ﺮ ّ ﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ‬ !‫ﻳﺮﺟﻰ ﻗﺮﺍءﺓ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ، ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‬ :‫ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ‬ < ‫< ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺲ‬ ‫ﻳﺮﺟﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻟﻤﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﻣﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻗﺪ ﺗﻢ ﻭﺻﻒ ﺃﻱ‬ .‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ < ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﻓﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‬ ‫ﻣﺸﻜﻠﺔ...
Page 21 :‫ﻟﻠﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﻃﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬ :‫ﺇﻃﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﻤﺮ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‬ < ‫< ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺲ‬ • ‫• ﺃﻭﻗﻒ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻻ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ < ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ < ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬ ‫ ﺃﻭ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ﺃﻭ‬Wi-Fi ‫ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﻬﺎ. ﺃﻭﻗﻒ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ .‫، ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﻬﺎ‬GPS ‫ﻳﺘﻢ...
Page 22 ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻌ ﺮ ّ ﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ‬ ‫4. ﻗﺒﻞ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﻣﻔﺘﻮﺡ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺪﺭ ﻭﻧﻈﺎﻡ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻃﺎﻗﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ، ﻣﺪﺭﺟﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﻣﻦ ﻛﻢ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻬﻠﻜﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ .‫ﺍﻷﻛﺒﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﺻﻐﺮ‬ ‫3. ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺑﺨﻼﻑ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ .‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ...
Page 23 ‫5. ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻧﻘﺶ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻟﻘﻔﻞ‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﻧﻘﺶ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻟﻘﻔﻞ ﻟﺘﺄﻣﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ. ﺍﻟﻤﺲ‬ ‫ﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻭﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻴﺔ، ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻨﺰﻳﻞ‬ ‫< ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ < ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ < ﺗﺄﻣﻴﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺛﻮﻕ ﺑﻬﺎ ﻓﻘﻂ، ﻋﻠﻰ‬ .‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ < ﺇﺧﺘﺮ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ < ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺶ‬ ‫...
Page 24 ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻌ ﺮ ّ ﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ‬ ، PIN ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻌﺬ ّ ﺭ ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﻧﻘﺶ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻟﻘﻔﻞ، ﺃﻭ ﺭﻣﺰ‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮ‬ :‫ﺃﻭ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻭﺭ‬ .‫ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﻳﺠﺐ ﺍﺗﺒﺎﻋﻬﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻧﻘﺶ ﺍﻟﻘﻔﻞ‬ < ‫> ﺇﺫﺍ ﻧﺴﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺶ‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﻡ ﺟ ﺪ ً ﺍ ﺗﺬﻛﺮ ﻧﻘﺶ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻟﻘﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻗﻤﺖ‬ ‫...
Page 25 :‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬ .‫ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺧﻔﺾ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬ ‫ ﻭﻧﺴﻴﺖ ﻧﻘﺶ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻟﻘﻔﻞ، ﺗﺤﺘﺎﺝ ﺇﻟﻰ‬Google ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ، ﺣﺮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‬ LG ‫ﻓﻮﺭ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﺷﻌﺎﺭ‬ . PIN ‫ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺨﺔ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﻴﺔ ﻟـ‬ .‫ﻛﻠﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺑﻀﻊ ﺛﻮﺍﻥ ٍ ، ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻛﺔ‬ .Android ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻨﻌﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺃﺩﻭﺍﺕ ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ‬...
Page 26 ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻌ ﺮ ّ ﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ‬ ‫7. ﻓﺘﺢ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﻭﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﻫﺎ‬ ‫ﻣﺮﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺣﻲ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬ .‫ﻭﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪﻫﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ/ﺍﻟﻘﻔﻞ‬ Android ‫ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺗﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﺎﻡ ﺃﻣﺮ ً ﺍ ﺳﻬﻼ ً ﻣﻊ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ‬ ‫ﻧﻈﺮ ً ﺍ ﻹﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﻓﻲ ﺁﻥ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ. ﻻ‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮ‬...
Page 27 .‫• ﻧﺴﺦ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃ ﻴ ًﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ‬ (Suite .‫• ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ‬ ‫" ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺓ ﻋﻦ‬LG PC Suite" ‫ﺇﻥ ّ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬ .‫• ﻧﺴﺦ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃ ﻴ ًﺎ ﻭﺍﺳﺘﻌﺎﺩﺗﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻳﺴﺎﻋﺪﻙ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻋﺒﺮ‬ ‫• ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬...
Page 28 ‫ﺍﻧﺘﻘﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺪﻋﻢ < ﺩﻋﻢ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻮﻝ‬ Windows Vista‫( ﻭ‬Service pack 2 ‫ < ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﺍﺯ‬LG ‫ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻮﻟﺔ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ ﺑﺖ/46 ﺑﺖ‬Windows 7 32‫23 ﺑﺖ/46 ﺑﺖ ﻭ‬ ‫( ﺃﻭ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺪﻋﻢ < ﺩﻋﻢ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‬LG-P895) ‫ﺟﻴﺠﺎ‬ 1 ‫ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﻟﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻛﺰﻳﺔ: ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺠﺎﺕ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ‬ •...
Page 29 RAM) ‫ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ: ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻭﺻﻮﻝ ﻋﺸﻮﺍﺋﻲ‬ • LG ‫ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﻤﻦ ﻣﻦ‬USB ‫ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ :‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬ ‫ﺑﺴﻌﺔ 215 ﻣﻴﺠﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ‬ LG ‫ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﻤﻦ ﻣﻦ‬USB ‫ﻳﻠﺰﻡ ﺗﻮﻓﺮ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﻭﺃﻟﻮﺍﻥ‬ 768 x 1024 ‫ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻣﺎﺕ: ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺎﻧﺔ‬ • ‫ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻭﺗﺜﺒﻴﺘﻪ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ ً ﻋﻨﺪ‬LG ‫ﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ‬...
Page 30 .‫ﻭﺍﻟﺠﺪﺍﻭﻝ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺟﻌﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻟﻤﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬ :‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬ :‫ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﻣﻮﺿﺢ ﻓﻴﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‬ LG ‫ ، ﻓﺄﻧﺖ ﺑﺤﺎﺟﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‬USB ‫ﻛﻴﺒﻞ‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ. )ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻛﻴﺒﻞ‬ .‫ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬PC Suite (.Wi-Fi ‫ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ‬USB LG PC ‫ﺍﻟﺮﺟﺎء ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﻟﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ‬...
Page 31 ‫ﺍﻓﺘﺢ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ. ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻯ ﻭﺳﻴﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺒﻴﺮﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﺣﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ٍ ﻋﻤﻮﺩﻱ، ﺗﻤﺎ ﻣ ً ﺎ ﻣﺜﻠﻤﺎ ﺗﺤﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‬ ‫ ﺑﻬﻮﺍﺋﻲ‬LG-P895 ‫ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻱ. ﻟﻘﺪ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺰﻭﻳﺪ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ‬ .‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻲ ﻭﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺩﺍﺧﻠﻲ. ﺍﺣﺮﺹ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺧﺪﺵ ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ ﻣﻦ‬...
Page 32 ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻌ ﺮ ّ ﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ‬ ‫21. ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻝ ﺗﺠ ﻤ ّ ﺪﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﺠﻤﺪﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﺳﺘﺠﺎﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‬ :‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﻣﺤﺎﻭﻟﺔ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻪ‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ/ﺍﻟﻘﻔﻞ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ‬ .‫01 ﺛﻮﺍﻥ ٍ ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻪ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻝ ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻜﻠﺔ، ﻳﺮﺟﻰ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻤﺮﻛﺰ‬ .‫ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ‬...
Page 33 ‫ﻣﻜﻮﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ‬ ‫ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ/ﺍﻹﻗﻔﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻷﺫﻥ‬ ‫• ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ/ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‬ . ً ‫ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻣﻄﻮﻻ‬ ‫ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﺳﺘﺸﻌﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﺷﻴﺎء ﺍﻟﻘﺮﻳﺒﺔ‬ ‫• ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺿﻐﻄﺔ ﻗﺼﻴﺮﺓ ﻟﻘﻔﻞ/ﺇﻟﻐﺎء‬ ‫ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ .‫ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﺤﺪﻳﺚ‬ ‫ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ‬ .‫ﻣﺆﺧﺮ...
Page 34 ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻌ ﺮ ّ ﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ‬ ‫ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﺳﺘﺸﻌﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﺷﻴﺎء ﺍﻟﻘﺮﻳﺒﺔ‬ :‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻠﻘﻲ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺟﺮﺍﺋﻬﺎ، ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﺳﺘﺸﻌﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺷﻲء ﺛﻘﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺯﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺷﻴﺎء ﺍﻟﻘﺮﻳﺒﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋ ﻴ ًﺎ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ‬ LCD ‫ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺠﻠﻮﺱ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﻟﺤﺎﻕ ﺿﺮﺭ ﺑﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫ﻭﺇﻗﻔﺎﻝ...
Page 35 ‫ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ‬ ‫ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬ ‫/ﻣﻨﻔﺬ‬USB/‫ﻣﻨﻔﺬ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺣﻦ‬ QuickMemo ‫ﻟـ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ‬ :‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‬ • .‫ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﻧﻴﻦ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺻﻮﺕ‬ :‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ‬ • .‫ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻷﺫﻥ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ‬ :‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﺴﺎﺭ‬ • ‫ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ/ﺍﻹﻗﻔﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﻣﻘﺒﺲ ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺫﻥ‬ .‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ‬...
Page 36 ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻌ ﺮ ّ ﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎء ﻣﺮﻓﻖ ﺑﺤﺠﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ . ﻳﺮﺟﻰ ﻋﺪﻡ ﻓﺘﺢ‬ (Flash) ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬ .‫ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ‬ ‫ﻣﻜﺒﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬...
Page 37 QuickMemo ‫ ﻹﻧﺸﺎء ﻣﺬﻛﺮﺍﺕ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻋﻤﻠﻲ ﻭﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء‬QuickMemo ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬ .‫ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ، ﻣﻊ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﺤﻔﻮﻇﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ‬ Quick ‫ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫ﻟﺤﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﻤﺬﻛﺮﺓ ﻣﻊ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺲ‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻘﻠﻢ، ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ، ﺍﻟﻤﻤﺤﺎﺓ‬ ‫ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬Memo .‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ‬ .‫ﻭﺃﻧﺸﺊ...
Page 38 ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻌ ﺮ ّ ﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ‬ ‫ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺁﺧﺮﻳﻦ‬QuickMemo ‫– ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﻳ ُﺮﺟﻰ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻃﺮﻑ ﺍﻹﺻﺒﻊ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬ :‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬ .‫ﺃﻭ ﻣﺸﺎﺭﻛﺘﻬﺎ ﻣﻌﻬﻢ‬ .‫. ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺃﻇﺎﻓﺮﻙ‬QuickMemo ‫ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ‬ .‫– ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﻤﺬﻛﺮﺓ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ‬ QuickMemo ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‬ ‫ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻔﻮﻇﺔ‬QuickMemo ‫ﻋﺮﺽ‬ ‫،...
Page 39 Micro-USIM ‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬ :Micro-USIM ‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﺪء ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻜﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪ، ﻳﺠﺐ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺈﻋﺪﺍﺩﻩ. ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬ .‫ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﻣﺸﺒﻚ‬ Micro-USIM ‫ﺍﻓﺘﺢ ﻏﻄﺎء ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬ ّ ‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﻓﺘﺤﺘﻬﺎ. ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻥ‬ Micro-USIM ‫ﺍﺩﻓﻊ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬ ‫ﻧﺎﺣﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻼﻣﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﻫﺒﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻣﻮﺟﻬﺔ ﻧﺤﻮ‬ .‫ﺍﻷﺳﻔﻞ‬...
Page 40 ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻌ ﺮ ّ ﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ‬ ‫ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‬ .‫ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﻣﻮﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺣﻦ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ. ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺣﻦ ﻭﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻠﻪ ﺑﻤﺄﺧﺬ ﻛﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻲ‬ ‫ﻳﺠﺐ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﺃﻭﻻ ً ﻟﺘﺤﺴﻴﻦ ﻓﺘﺮﺓ ﻋﻤﻞ‬ :‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬ .‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬...
Page 41 ‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﻗﻔﻠﻬﺎ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋ ﻴ ًﺎ. ﻳﺴﺎﻋﺪ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻨﻊ ﺍﻟﻠﻤﺲ‬ ‫ﺗﺄﻣﻴﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻔﻞ‬ .‫ﺑﻄﺮﻳﻖ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﺄ ﻭﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻮﻓﻴﺮ ﻃﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺃﻧﺖ ﻭﺣﺪﻙ ﻓﺘﺢ ﻗﻔﻠﻬﺎ‬ ‫، ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬LG-P895 ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‬ .‫ﻟﻠﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‬ .‫ﻟﻘﻔﻞ ﻫﺎﺗﻔﻚ‬ ‫ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ/ﺍﻟﻘﻔﻞ‬...
Page 42 ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻌ ﺮ ّ ﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ‬ ‫ ﻟﻔﺘﺢ‬Google ‫ﺑﻌﺪﻫﺎ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺴﺎﺏ‬ :‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬ .‫ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‬ .‫ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﻳﺠﺐ ﺍﺗﺒﺎﻋﻬﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻧﻘﺶ ﺍﻟﻘﻔﻞ‬ ‫ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‬Google ‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻝ ﻟﻢ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺈﻧﺸﺎء ﺣﺴﺎﺏ‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﻡ ﺟ ﺪ ً ﺍ ﺗﺬﻛﺮ ﻧﻘﺶ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻟﻘﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻗﻤﺖ‬ .‫ﺃﻭ...
Page 43 ‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻚ‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻤﻴﺤﺎﺕ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻤﺲ‬ :‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻤﻴﺤﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻘﻞ ﺿﻤﻦ‬ .‫• ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻋﻨﺼﺮ، ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﻭﺳﻂ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ‬ .‫ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‬ ‫• ﻻ ﺣﺎﺟﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﺑﻘﻮﺓ؛ ﻓﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻤﺲ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻠﻤﺲ - ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ/ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ﺃﻭ ﻓﺘﺢ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ، ﻣﺎ ﻋﻠﻴﻚ‬ ‫ﺑﺸﻜﻞ...
Page 44 ‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻚ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻟﻤﺲ ﺭﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻹﻇﻬﺎﺭ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ‬ .‫ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻤﺲ ﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ‬ .‫ﻣﺮﺭ ﺇﺻﺒﻌﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺎﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻴﻦ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﻛﻞ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ‬ .‫ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺭﻣﺰ ﺍﻻﺳﻤﺎء ﻟﻔﺘﺢ ﺍﻻﺳﻤﺎء‬ .‫ﻭﺗﻨﺰﻳﻼﺕ ﻭﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﻭﺍﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺧﻠﻔﻴﺎﺕ‬ .‫ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺭﻣﺰ ﺩﻓﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺬﻛﺮﺍﺕ ﻟﻔﺘﺢ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﻜﺮﺓ‬ .‫ﺍﻟﻤﺲ...
Page 45 ‫ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ، ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ‬ ‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺘﻬﺎ. ﺳﻮﻑ ﺗﺮﻯ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻤﺖ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ‬ .‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺘﻬﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺰﻳﻼﺕ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﻭﺍﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬ .‫ﺍﺳﺤﺒﻬﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﻭﺍﺭﻓﻊ ﺇﺻﺒﻌﻚ‬ ‫ﺃﻭ...
Page 46 ‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻚ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﻣﺆﺧ ﺮ ً ﺍ‬ ‫. ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺤﺪﻳﺜﺔ‬ ‫ﺇﻃﺎﺭﺍ ً ﻣﻨﺒﺜﻘﺎ ً ﻣﻊ ﺭﻣﻮﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻣﺘﻬﺎ‬ . ً ‫ﻣﺆﺧﺮﺍ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺭﻣﺰﺍ ً ﻟﻔﺘﺢ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻪ. ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﺲ‬ .‫ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ...
Page 47 Wi-Fi ‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋ ﻴ ًﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ‬ .‫ﺍﻟﻔﻌﺎﻟﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻮﻟﺔ‬ Micro-USIM ‫ﻻ ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ‬ ‫ﻻ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺪﺓ ﺭﻣﻮﺯ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ، ﻣﺜﻞ ﻗﻮﺓ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﻭﻓﺘﺮﺓ ﻋﻤﻞ‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺮﺣﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﺠﻮﻳﺔ‬ .‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ...
Page 48 ‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻚ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺒﻪ ﻣﻌﻴﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﻗﻴﺪ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻈﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺑﺮﻳﺪ ﺻﻮﺗﻲ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ‬ ‫ﻣﻜﺒﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬ ‫ﺗﻢ ﺇﺳﻜﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﻧﻴﻦ‬ ‫ﺗﻢ ﻛﺘﻢ ﻣﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‬ ‫ ﻗﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬NFC ‫ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺮﺩ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ‬ ‫ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ﻗﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﺸﺤﻮﻧﺔ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮ...
Page 49 ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻗﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ‬ ‫ﺟﺎﺭﻱ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻲ‬ ‫ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ‬Gmail ‫ﺑﺮﻳﺪ‬ USB ‫ﻋﺒﺮ ﻛﻴﺒﻞ‬ ‫ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ‬Google talk ‫ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﻨﺰﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ‬ ‫ﺗﺤﻤﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﻏﻨﻴﺔ ﻗﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫ ﻗﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﻜﺸﻒ‬GPS ‫ ﻧﺸﻂ‬USB ‫ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ‬ GPS ‫ﺍﺳﺘﻼﻡ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﻊ ﻣﻦ‬...
Page 50 ‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻚ‬ ‫ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ً ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻧﺺ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﺔ ﻭﻣﺤﻤﻮﻟﺔ ﻧﺸﻄﺔ‬Wi-Fi ‫ﻧﻘﻄﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ. ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ ً ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ‬ ، ً ‫ﺗﺤﺘﺎﺝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻧﺺ. ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﻳﺪﻭﻳﺎ‬ ‫...
Page 51 .‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻹﻧﺸﺎء ﺳﻄﺮ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﻓﻲ ﺣﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ‬ .‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻟﺤﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ‬ ‫ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻷﺣﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺸ ﻜ ّ ﻠﺔ‬ ،‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺤﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻧﺴﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻹﺳﺒﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻛﻠﻐﺔ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ‬ ‫ﺑﺈﻣﻜﺎﻧﻚ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺃﺣﺮﻑ ﻣﻤﻴﺰﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻧﺴﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻹﺳﺒﺎﻧﻴﺔ‬ .("á" ‫)ﻣﺜﻞ‬ ‫"، ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ‬á" ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺎﻝ، ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻑ‬ ‫"...
Page 52 Google ‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺣﺴﺎﺏ‬ .‫ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻫﺎﺗﻔﻚ ﻟﻠﻤﺮﺓ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ، ﺳﺘﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ‬ ‫ﻓﺮﺻﺔ ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ، ﻭﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺴﺎﺑﻚ‬ ‫ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ، ﺗﺘﻢ‬Google ‫ﻣﺎ ﺇﻥ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺈﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺣﺴﺎﺏ‬ ‫ ﻭﻣﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ‬Google ‫ﻓﻲ‬ .‫ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﻳﺐ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋ ﻴ ًﺎ‬Google ‫ﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻣﻊ ﺣﺴﺎﺏ‬ .Google ‫،...
Page 53 ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺒﻜﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ‬ Wi-Fi ‫ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻭﺫﻟﻚ‬Wi-Fi ‫ﺃﻭﻗﻒ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻴﺰﺓ‬ .‫ﻹﻃﺎﻟﺔ ﻓﺘﺮﺓ ﻋﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬ ‫، ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺇﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ‬Wi-Fi ‫ﺑﻔﻀﻞ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ‬ ‫ﻋﺎﻟﻲ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﺿﻤﻦ ﺗﻐﻄﻴﺔ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ‬ ‫ ﺃﻭ‬Wi-Fi ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺗﻐﻄﻴﺔ‬ :‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬ ‫(. ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺘﻊ ﺑﺈﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬WAP) ‫...
Page 54 ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺒﻜﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ‬ ‫ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﻭﺍﺑﺪﺃ ﺑﻤﺴﺢ‬ ‫ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬Wi-Fi ‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ‬ .‫ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ‬Wi-Fi ‫ﺷﺒﻜﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻟﻼﻃﻼﻉ‬ Wi-Fi ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻌﻈﻢ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻮﻟﺔ‬ ‫ ﺍﻟﻨﺸﻄﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﺍﻗﻌﺔ ﺿﻤﻦ‬Wi-Fi ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺷﺒﻜﺎﺕ‬ .‫ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬...
Page 55 ‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ﻭﺇﻗﺮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻣﻊ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ‬ ‫، ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ‬LG-P895 ‫ﺑﻔﻀﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‬ !‫ﺗﻠﻤﻴﺢ‬ .‫ﻳﺠﺐ ﻋﻠﻴﻚ ﺇﻗﺮﺍﻥ ﺟﻬﺎﺯﻙ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺁﺧﺮ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻪ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺘﺎﻉ ﺑﺘﻘﻨﻴﺔ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻲ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ. ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ‬ < ‫< ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﻣﺸﺎﺭﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻣﻌﻪ ﻳﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﺃﻳﻀ ً ﺎ‬...
Page 56 ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺒﻜﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ‬ ‫ﻣﺸﺎﺭﻛﺔ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‬ .‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺮﺍﻥ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﻧﺠﺎﺡ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺮﺍﻥ، ﻳﺘﺼﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯﻙ ﺑﺎﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ‬ ‫ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﺔ ﻭﻣﺤﻤﻮﻟﺔ ﻫﻲ‬Wi-fi ‫ ﻭﻧﻘﻄﺔ‬USB ‫ﺇﻥ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ‬ .‫ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‬ ‫ﻣﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﺭﺍﺋﻌﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺗﻮﻓﺮ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻻﺕ ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ. ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ‬ ‫ﻣﺸﺎﺭﻛﺔ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻮﻝ ﻣﻊ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬ ‫ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ...
Page 57 ‫ﺃﺧﺮﻯ، ﻗﻢ ﺑﺰﻳﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‬ Windows 7 ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﺑﻨﻈﺎﻡ‬ !‫ﺗﻠﻤﻴﺢ‬ http://www.android.com/tether. ‫(، ﻓﻠﻦ‬Ubuntu ‫ )ﻣﺜﻞ‬Linux ‫ﺃﻭ ﺇﺻﺪﺍﺭ ﺣﺪﻳﺚ ﻣﻦ‬ :‫ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﺔ ﻭﻣﺤﻤﻮﻟﺔ‬Wi-fi ‫ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺘﺎﺝ ﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﺤﻀﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻟﻼﺗﺼﺎﻝ. ﺃﻣﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ‬ ‫ ﺃﻭ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ‬Windows ‫ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺇﺻﺪﺍﺭ ً ﺍ ﺃﻗﺪﻡ ﻣﻦ‬ <...
Page 58 ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺒﻜﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ‬ ‫ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺴﻤﻴﺔ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﺔ ﻭﻣﺤﻤﻮﻟﺔ ﻭﺗﺄﻣﻴﻨﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺎﺕ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬ .Wi-Fi ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ﺷﺒﻜﺎﺕ‬ ‫ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻬﺎﺗﻔﻚ‬Wi-Fi ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ‬ ‫ﻟﺘﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﻣﻊ‬ ‫ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻟﻤﺲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ‬ • .‫ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻪ‬Wi-Fi ‫( ﻭﺗﺄﻣﻴﻦ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ‬SSID) (WPA2) 2 ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ...
Page 59 ‫ ﻣﺴﺒﻘ ً ﺎ‬Wi-Fi Direct ‫ ﻭ‬Wi-Fi ‫ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ‬ !‫ﺍﻧﺘﺒﺎﻩ‬ .‫ﻭﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﻴﻦ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﻧﻔﺴﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﻛـ ﻣﻔﺘﻮﺣﺔ، ﻓﻠﻦ ﺗﺘﻤﻜﻦ‬ < ‫< ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺲ‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﻣﻨﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺮﺡ ﺑﻪ ﻟﻠﺨﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ...
Page 60 ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺒﻜﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ‬ ‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ً ﺍ ﻟﻼﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ‬ ‫ ﻟﻠﻤﺸﺎﺭﻛﺔ ﻋﺒﺮ‬Wi-Fi Direct ‫ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ‬ .‫ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﻣﺴﺤﻬﺎ‬ SmartShare ‫ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ – ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﻟﺘﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻣﺎﻟﻚ‬ Wi-Fi ‫ ﺑﻤﺴﺢ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ‬Wi-Fi Direct ‫ﺗﻘﻮﻡ‬ ‫ ﺍﻟﻘﺪﻳﻤﺔ‬Wi-Fi ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ، ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻤﻜ ّ ﻦ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ‬ ‫...
Page 61 .‫ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺓ‬ ،‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺼﺒﺢ ﻫﺎﺗﻔﻚ ﻣﻠﻜ ً ﺎ ﻟﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ‬ :‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬ ‫ ﻭﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﺡ ﺑﻤﺸﺎﺭﻛﺔ‬SmartShare ‫ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻬﻠﻚ ﻗﺪﺭ ً ﺍ ﺃﻛﺒﺮ ﻣﻦ ﻃﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﻤﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ‬ ‫ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ‬Wi-Fi Direct ‫ﻣﻠﻜﺎ ً ﻟﻌﻤﻴﻞ. ﻻ ﻳﻮﻓﺮ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﺇﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ. ﻗﺪ ﺗ ُ ﻔﺮﺽ ﺗﻜﺎﻟﻴﻒ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﻴﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ‬ <...
Page 62 ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺒﻜﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻗﺴﻢ "ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺘﺮﻛﺔ ﻟﺪﻱ"، ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ‬ ‫ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ‬DLNA ‫ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ‬ :‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬ ‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ‬ ‫ﺑﺄﺟﻬﺰﺗﻚ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ )ﻣﺜﻼ ً ، ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ ﻭﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬ ‫ﻣﺸﺎﺭﻛﺘﻬﺎ. ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻭﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬ .(‫ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻲ‬ .‫ﻭﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ‬...
Page 63 ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﺼﻐﺮﺓ ﻟﻠﻤﺤﺘﻮﻯ ﻭﺍﻧﻘﻠﻬﺎ‬ ‫: ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‬ ‫ﺑﺈﺻﺒﻌﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ ‫: ﺣﺎﻟ ﻴ ًﺎ، ﺗﺘﻢ ﻣﺸﺎﺭﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻯ ﻋﺒﺮ‬ .‫< ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ .SmartShare ‫ﻟﻤﺸﺎﺭﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻣﻦ ﻗﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ (‫)ﻣﺜﻼ...
Page 64 ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺒﻜﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ‬ ‫ﻟﺘﺤﻤﻴﻞ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻜﺘﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻌﻴﺪﺓ‬ ‫ﻟﺘﻨﺰﻳﻞ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻜﺘﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻌﻴﺪﺓ‬ < ‫< ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺲ‬ ‫ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ‬ :‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬ SmartShare "‫ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ ﻭﻣﻦ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ "ﺍﺳﺘﻼﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻣﻜﺘﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺲ...
Page 65 ‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻣﻜﺘﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻌﻴﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ‬ .‫ﺗﺤﻤﻴﻠﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﻻ ﺗﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻤﻜ ّ ﻨﺔ ﺑﻤﻴﺰﺓ‬ :‫ﺇﺷﻌﺎﺭ‬ ‫ ﻭﺑﺎﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ ﻟﻦ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ‬DMS ‫ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺗﺤﻤﻴﻞ‬DLNA ‫ﺑﺘﺤﻤﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ. ﺑﻀﻌﺔ ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﻏﻴﺮ‬ .‫ﻣﻌﺘﻤﺪﺓ‬...
Page 66 ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﻻﺳﻤﺎء‬ ‫ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ‬ .‫ﻟﻔﺘﺢ ﺍﻻﺳﻤﺎء‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺲ‬ .‫ﻟﻔﺘﺢ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺲ‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﺮ ﻋﺒﺮ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﻤﺎء ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻷﺣﺮﻑ‬ ‫ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ. ﻟﺤﺬﻑ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﻠﻴﻠﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻻﺳﻤﺎء ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﺭﻗﻢ، ﺍﻟﻤﺲ‬ .‫ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﻟﻤﺲ ﺑﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ﺍﺳﻢ‬ .‫ﻹﺟﺮﺍء...
Page 67 ‫ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﻭﻣﺮﺭ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺳﺮﻳﻌﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ‬ .‫ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ‬ < ‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ، ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﺛﻢ ﺍﻃﻠﺐ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ. ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺳﺮﻳﻌﺔ‬ !‫ﺗﻠﻤﻴﺢ‬ ‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﻃﻠﺒﻬﺎ ﻣﺆﺧﺮ ً ﺍ ﻋﻦ‬ .‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ...
Page 68 ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺃﻭ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬ ‫ﻹﻧﻬﺎء ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﺸﻄﺔ، ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺇﻧﻬﺎء‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺃﻱ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻓﻲ ﺳﺠﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬ !‫ﺗﻠﻤﻴﺢ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﻭﻣﺮﺭ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ‬ .‫ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ، ﻭﻭﻗﺘﻬﺎ، ﻭﻣﺪﺗﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﻧﺤﻮ ﺍﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ﺭﻣﺰ ﺇﻧﻬﺎء ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ، ﺛﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺣﺬﻑ‬ !‫ﺗﻠﻤﻴﺢ‬...
Page 69 ‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻲ - ﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‬ ،‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻪ ﻟﻼﺳﺘﻤﺎﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ‬ .‫ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺿﺒﻄﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻲ ﻭﺇﺩﺍﺭﺗﻪ، ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ‬ ‫ﺃﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺖ – ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﺗﺠﻤﻴﻊ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺑﺎﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ‬ .‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻲ...
Page 70 ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﻴﺔ – ﻳﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻚ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺑﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﻮﺟﻴﻪ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ - ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻣﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻞ‬ ‫ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ، ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺨﻂ ﻣﺸﻐﻮﻻ ً ، ﺃﻭ ﺗﻌﺬﺭ‬ :‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‬ .‫ﺍﻟﺮﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ، ﺃﻭ ﻣﺘﻌﺬﺭ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻴﻪ‬ ‫ﻫﻮﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺼﻞ: ﻳﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻚ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺑﻌﺮﺽ ﺭﻗﻤﻚ‬ .‫ﻓﻲ...
Page 71 ‫ﺍﻻﺳﻤﺎء‬ ‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﻤﺎء ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻭ ﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺘﻬﺎ ﻣﻊ‬ ‫ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺤﺴﺎﺑﺎﺕ‬Google ‫ﺍﻻﺳﻤﺎء ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺴﺎﺏ‬ ‫، ﻭﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻻﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪ، ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺲ‬ .‫ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺪﻋﻢ ﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﻤﺎء‬ < ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ. ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﺳﻤﺎء‬ .‫ﺇﻧﺸﺎء...
Page 72 .‫ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﺣﺪ ﺍﻻﺳﻤﺎء ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻠﻪ‬ .‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﻨﺠﻤﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻳﻤﻴﻦ ﺍﻻﺳﻢ. ﻳﺘﺤﻮﻝ ﻟﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻨﺠﻤﺔ‬ ‫" ﻋﻠﻰ‬ LG PC Suite" ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‬ .‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺻﻔﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺃﻭﻻ ً . ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻭﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﺳﻢ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﻀﻠﺔ‬...
Page 73 ‫ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻲ ﻭ ﺍﺳﻤﺎء ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ، ﻋﻠﻴﻚ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء‬ .‫ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻴﺮﺍﺩ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺒﺜﻖ، ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺣﺪﺩ ﻣﻠﻔ ً ﺎ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪﺍﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﻭﺭﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‬ ‫ﻭﺳﻴﻈﻬﺮ‬ .LG PC Suite .Windows Explorer ‫ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ‬ ‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺍﻻﺳﻤﺎء ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﻴﺮﺍﺩﻩ ﻓﻲ‬ .‫ ﻭﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ﻓﺘﺢ‬Windows Explorer ‫ﺍﻧﻘﺮ...
Page 74 ‫ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ‬ .‫ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺣﻘﻞ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻭﺍﺑﺪﺃ ﺑﺈﻧﺸﺎء ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺘﻚ‬ ‫ ﻣﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ‬LG-P895 ‫ﻳﺠﻤﻊ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ‬ ‫ ﻓﻲ‬MMS ‫ ﻭﺭﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ‬SMS ‫ﺍﻟﻘﺼﻴﺮﺓ‬ ‫ﻟﻔﺘﺢ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ. ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺑﻴﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ .‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﺑﺪﻳﻬﻴﺔ ﻭﺳﻬﻠﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬ ‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻣﻮﺿﻮﻉ ﻭﺗﺠﺎﻫﻞ ﻭﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺭﻣﺰ ﺗﻌﺒﻴﺮﻱ‬ .‫ﻭﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ‬...
Page 75 ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺍﺑﻂ‬ ‫ﻛﻤﺎ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﺩﻭﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ. ﻋﻨﺪ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺭﺳﺎﺋﻞ‬ .‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﻴﺔ ﻭﺇﺭﺳﺎﻟﻬﺎ، ﺗﻨﺸﺄ ﺳﻠﺴﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ‬ ‫( ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ‬MMS‫ ﻭ‬SMS) ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ‬ ‫ﺗﺒﺎﺩﻟﻬﺎ ﻣﻊ ﺟﻬﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺑﺘﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺯﻣﻨﻲ ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﺗﺤﺼﻞ‬ .‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﻈﺮﺓ ﻋﺎﻣﺔ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺎﺩﺛﺔ‬ ً ‫ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮ: ﻗﺪ ﻳﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻦ 061 ﺣﺮﻓﺎ‬ ‫ﻣﻦ...
Page 76 ‫ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ‬ ‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ‬ LG-P895 ‫ﻟﻘﺪ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ‬ .‫ﻣﺴﺒﻘ ً ﺎ، ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺭ‬ .‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﻓﻘ ً ﺎ ﻟﺘﻔﻀﻴﻼﺗﻚ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺭﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ، ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺲ‬ .‫ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ، ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬...
Page 77 ‫ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ-ﺍﻻﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ‬ :‫ﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺣﺴﺎﺏ ﺑﺮﻳﺪ ﺇﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ ﺁﺧﺮ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ ﻟﻘﺮﺍءﺓ ﺭﺳﺎﺋﻞ‬ .Gmail ‫ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ‬ < ‫< ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺲ‬ • :‫ﻳﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﺤﺴﺎﺑﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‬ < ‫ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ < ﻓﻲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺴﺎﺏ، ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺲ‬ .Exchange‫...
Page 78 ‫ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ-ﺍﻻﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺮﻣﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩ‬ :‫ﻟﺤﺬﻑ ﺣﺴﺎﺏ ﺑﺮﻳﺪ ﺇﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ‬ ،‫ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺞ ﺑﺄﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻷﻳﺴﺮ، ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﺤﺴﺎﺏ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ‬ < ‫< ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺲ‬ • ‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﻟﺤﺴﺎﺑﺎﺗﻚ ﻓﻲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬ < ‫ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ < ﻓﻲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺴﺎﺏ، ﺍﻟﻤﺲ‬ .‫ﺍﻟﺤﺴﺎﺑﺎﺕ‬...
Page 79 ‫ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﻣﻊ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺤﺴﺎﺑﺎﺕ‬ .‫ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﺑﻔﺎﺻﻠﺔ ﻣﻨﻘﻮﻃﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺣﻘﻞ ﻧﺴﺨﺔ/ﻧﺴﺨﺔ ﻣﺨﻔﻴﺔ ﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻧﺴﺨﺔ/ﻧﺴﺨﺔ‬ ‫ﻟﻜﻞ ﺣﺴﺎﺏ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﺔ ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩ، ﻭﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ‬ .‫ﻹﺭﻓﺎﻕ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﺰﻡ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ‬ ‫ﻣﺨﻔﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﺎﺩﺭ، ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺮﺳﻠﺔ، ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺴﻮﺩﺍﺕ. ﻗﺪ ﺗﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ‬ .‫ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﻧﺺ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻓﻈﺎﺕ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﻴﺔ، ﻭﻳﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺲ‬...
Page 80 ‫ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ-ﺍﻻﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﻭﺻﻮﻝ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺑﺮﻳﺪ ﺇﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ‬ !‫ﺗﻠﻤﻴﺢ‬ ‫ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩ، ﺳﺘﺘﻠﻘﻰ ﺇﺷﻌﺎﺭﺍ ً ﺑﻬﺎ ﺑﺈﺻﺪﺍﺭ ﺻﻮﺕ‬ ‫ﺃﻭ ﺑﺎﻻﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ. ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﺷﻌﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ‬ .‫ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻹﺷﻌﺎﺭﺍﺕ‬...
Page 81 ‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻌ ﺮ ّ ﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺤ ﺪ ّ ﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ‬ ‫ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ – ﻟﻠﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻬﺔ ﻟﻠﺨﻠﻒ ﻭﺗﻠﻚ‬ ٢٣٠٢٢ ٢٣٠٢٢ .‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻬﺔ ﻟﻸﻣﺎﻡ‬ ‫ﻻﻗﻂ ﺍﻻﺑﺘﺴﺎﻣﺔ – ﻗﻞ "ﺗﺸﻴﺰ" )ﺍﺑﺘﺴﻢ( ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺼﺒﺢ ﺟﺎﻫﺰ ً ﺍ ﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ‬ .‫ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ – ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ ﻗﺒﻞ‬ .‫ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ...
Page 82 ‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫ﺑﻤﺠﺮﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺳﺮﻳﻌﺔ‬ .‫ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺁﺧﺮ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺲ‬ ‫ﺍﻓﺘﺢ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﻟﻤﺸﺎﺭﻛﺔ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﻚ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ﻭﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ‬ ‫ﻣﻊ ﺍﻹﻣﺴﺎﻙ ﺑﺎﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ، ﻭﺟ ّ ﻪ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺑﺎﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‬ ‫+ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺬﻛﺮﺓ‬Google ‫ ﻭ‬Gmail ‫ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ ﻭ‬ .‫ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮﻩ‬ . + ‫ ﻭ ﺍﺟﺘﻤﺎﻋﻲ‬Picasa ‫ﻭﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﻭ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺲ...
Page 83 ‫ﻛﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻻﺳﻢ ﺃﻭ ﻛﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺴﻴﻦ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﻓﻲ ﻇﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‬ .‫ﺍﻟﻘﻔﻞ‬ .‫ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ‬ .‫ﻧﻘﻞ – ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﻟﻨﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺁﺧﺮ‬ .‫ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﻓﻨﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬ .‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺴﻤﻴﺔ – ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ‬ .‫ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻹﺿﺎﻓﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ...
Page 84 ‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ .‫ﺍﻟﺸﻤﺲ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻴﻪ‬ .‫– ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺗﻐﻴﺮ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﺤﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ‬ .‫– ﻟﻠﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﻣﻌﻴﻨﺔ‬ ‫– ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻬﺔ ﻟﻠﺨﻠﻒ‬ ‫– ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺎﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ. ﺇﺫﺍ ﺍﺧﺘﺮﺕ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ‬ .‫ﻭﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻬﺔ ﻟﻸﻣﺎﻡ‬ ‫– ﻗﻞ "ﺗﺸﻴﺰ" )ﺍﺑﺘﺴﻢ( ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺼﺒﺢ ﺟﺎﻫﺰ ً ﺍ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺒﺎﻧﺔ...
Page 85 ‫– ﻟﺘﺤﺴﻴﻦ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﻓﻲ ﻇﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‬ ‫ﺗﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻴﺰﺓ‬ :‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬ .‫ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ‬ .‫ ﻧﺸﻄﺔ‬GPS .‫- ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﻓﻨﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬ .‫– ﺣﺪﺩ ﻭﺍﺣ ﺪ ً ﺍ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺻﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ‬ ‫– ﺿﺒﻂ ﻓﺘﺮﺓ ﺗﺄﺧﻴﺮ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ‬ .‫–...
Page 86 ‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﺮﻭﺝ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ، ﺗﻌﻮﺩ ﺑﻌﺾ‬ !‫ﺗﻠﻤﻴﺢ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ، ﻣﺜﻞ ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ‬ .‫ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﻭﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ ﻭﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ‬ .‫ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﻘﻊ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻓﻮﻕ ﻣﺤﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ، ﻟﺬﺍ‬ !‫ﺗﻠﻤﻴﺢ‬ ،‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺃﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺟﻮﺩﺗﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﺳﺘﺘﻤﻜ...
Page 87 ‫ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻌ ﺮ ّ ﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺤ ﺪ ّ ﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ‬ ‫ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ – ﻟﻠﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻬﺔ ﻟﻠﺨﻠﻒ ﻭﺗﻠﻚ‬ .‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻬﺔ ﻟﻸﻣﺎﻡ‬ .‫ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ/ﺗﺼﻐﻴﺮ – ﻟﻠﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ – ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺿﻮء ﺍﻟﺸﻤﺲ ﻓﻲ‬ .‫ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ...
Page 88 ‫ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺳﺮﻳﻊ‬ !‫ﺗﻠﻤﻴﺢ‬ .‫ﺍﻓﺘﺢ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺯﺭ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬ .‫– ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬ ‫ﺳﻴﻈﻬﺮ ﻣﺤﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ ﻓﻲ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ .‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺲ‬ .‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﻊ ﺣﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ، ﺻ ﻮ ّ ﺏ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺑﺎﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﻣﻮﺿﻮﻉ‬ ‫ﺑﻌﺪ...
Page 89 ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻣﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﻟﺤﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻪ. ﻗﻢ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺄﻛﻴﺪ ﻋﺒﺮ ﻟﻤﺲ ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ. ﻳﻌﺎﻭﺩ ﻣﺤﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ‬ ‫ﻟﻔﺘﺢ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺤﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ، ﺍﻟﻤﺲ‬ .‫ﺍﻟﻈﻬﻮﺭ‬ .‫ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻣﺔ‬ .‫ﻟﻔﺘﺢ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺲ‬ .‫– ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺗﻐﻴﺮ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﺤﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ‬ .‫ﻧﻘﻞ – ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﻟﻨﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺁﺧﺮ‬ ‫–...
Page 90 ‫ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬ .‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻓﻲ ﻇﺮﻭﻑ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﻣﻌﺘﻤﺔ‬ ‫– ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﻳﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻢ‬ ‫- ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ )ﺑﺎﻟﺒﻜﺴﻞ( ﺍﻟﺬﻱ‬ .‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻪ ﻟﻠﺘﻮ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋ ﻴ ًﺎ‬ .‫ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﺴﺠﻴﻠﻪ‬ ‫– ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ ﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫– ﻟﺘﺤﺴﻴﻦ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﻓﻲ ﻇﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‬ .‫ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬...
Page 91 ‫ﻣﺤﺮﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬ .‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﺧﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺻﻮﺭ/ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻭﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻚ‬ .‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ، ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ < ﻣﺤﺮﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬ .‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ ﻹﻧﺸﺎء ﻓﻴﻠﻢ‬...
Page 92 ‫ﻣﺤﺮﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬ ‫• ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﻭ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺴﻢ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ‬ ‫– ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ‬ ‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻭﺳﺎﺋﻂ‬ ‫، ﺛﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺣﺬﻑ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻀﺎﻓﺔ، ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻭﺳﺎﺋﻂ‬ .‫ﺻﻮﺭ ﻭ/ﺃﻭ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ‬ .(‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ )ﺃﻭ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﻜﻞ‬ ‫ﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺻﻮﺭ، ﺛﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺲ...
Page 93 ‫• ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺎﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻴﻦ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ‬ ‫– ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ‬ .‫ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻠﻪ‬ ‫ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﻣﺤﺮﺭ‬ .‫ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻧﺺ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ﺗﺮﺍﻛﺐ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ‬ • .‫ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬ ‫ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ﺗﺮﺍﻛﺐ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ •...
Page 94 .‫ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻣﺆﻗﺘ ً ﺎ‬ ‫ﻣﺸﻐﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬ .‫ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﻻﺳﺘﺌﻨﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬ LG-P895 ‫ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﺸﻐﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻣﻀ ﻤ ّ ﻨ ً ﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‬ .‫ﻣﻤﺎ ﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﻀﻠﺔ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ‬ .‫ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﻟﻠﺘﻘﺪﻡ 01 ﺛﻮﺍﻥ ٍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻡ‬...
Page 95 ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺭﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﻟﺮﺅﻳﺔ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ ‫ ﻋﻨﺪ‬Dolby ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬ .‫ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬ .‫ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﻣﻘﺒﺲ ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺔ ﺭﺃﺱ‬ ‫ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ، ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺭﻣﺰ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﻭﺍﺳﺤﺐ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺣﻲ ﺭﻓﻊ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻭﺧﻔﻀﻪ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ‬ .‫ﺷﺮﻳﻂ...
Page 96 ‫، ﺛﻢ‬USB ‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ< ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ < ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﺸﻐﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﻣﻀ ﻤ ّ ﻨ ً ﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‬ . (MTP) ‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ‬ ‫ ﻣﻤﺎ ﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‬LG-P895 ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻯ ﻭﺳﻴﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﻌﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﻀﻠﺔ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ. ﻟﻠﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺸﻐﻞ‬...
Page 97 . ً ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﺆﻗﺘﺎ‬ .‫ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺮﺍﺭ‬ .‫ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﻟﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﺝ‬ .‫ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﻻﺳﺘﺌﻨﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﻟﻼﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ ﻓﻲ‬ .‫ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ‬ .‫ﺍﻷﻟﺒﻮﻡ ﺃﻭ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻛﻠﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻏﺎﻧﻲ. ﻳﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﻫﺬﺍ‬ .‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻷﻏﻨﻴﺔ ﺗﺘﻀﻤﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﻠﻤﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺲ...
Page 98 LG Tag+ ‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﻨﻐﻤﺔ ﺭﻧﻴﻦ‬ .‫ﻭﺣﺬﻑ ﻭﻣﺸﺎﺭﻛﺔ ﻭﺑﺤﺚ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‬ LG Tag+ ‫ﻣﺎ ﻫﻲ‬ ‫ ﺑﺎﻟﺤﻔﻆ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺤﻤﻴﻞ ﺑﺴﻬﻮﻟﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ‬LG Tag+ ‫ﺗﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻚ‬ ‫ﻗﺪ ﺗﺨﻀﻊ ﺣﻘﻮﻕ ﺗﺄﻟﻴﻒ ﻭﻧﺸﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ‬ :‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬ ‫ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﺨﺼﺼﺔ ﻟﺘﻼﺋﻢ‬NFC ‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ‬...
Page 99 ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ، ﺛﻢ‬ .‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﻭﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ‬ < ‫< ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ < ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬ Tag+ reading ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬ .‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﻓﻘ ً ﺎ ﻟﺘﻔﻀﻴﻼﺗﻚ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﻟﻤﺲ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ، ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ .‫ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺭ‬...
Page 100 ‫ﺩﻓﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺬﻛﺮﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺩﻓﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺬﻛﺮﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺩﻓﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺬﻛﺮﺍﺕ، ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ‬ .‫ﻭﺍﺳﻌﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻭﺗﺨﺼﻴﺼﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬ ‫ﺩﻓﺘﺮ‬ < ‫< ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺲ‬ .‫ﺍﻟﻤﺬﻛﺮﺍﺕ‬ .‫ﻹﻧﺸﺎء ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ‬ ،‫ﻏﻄﺎء، ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ، ﻭﺭﻕ‬ ) ‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪﻩ‬ .‫ﻭﻟﻮﻥ...
Page 101 ‫– ﻣﺸﺎﺭﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻼﺣﻈﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻵﺧﺮﻳﻦ‬ ‫– ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺍءﺓ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺃﻭ ﻭﺿﻊ‬ + ‫ ﻭﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ ﻭ ﺍﺟﺘﻤﺎﻋﻲ‬Gmail ‫ﻋﺒﺮ‬ .‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ‬ Google+ ‫ ﻭ‬Picasa‫ﻭ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ﻭﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﻭ‬ .‫– ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﺟﻊ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ‬ .‫ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺬﻛﺮﺓ‬ .‫– ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﻟﻠﻜﺘﺎﺑﺔ‬ .‫– ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﻤﺬﻛﺮﺓ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ‬ ‫–...
Page 102 .LG SmartWorld ‫ﻭﺍﺣﺼﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﻀﻮﻳﺔ‬ ‫ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ‬LG SmartWorld ‫ﻳﻘﺪﻡ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻮﻗﺔ - ﺍﻷﻟﻌﺎﺏ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺎﺕ ﻭﻧﻐﻤﺎﺕ‬ .‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻨﺰﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪﻩ‬ ‫ ﻓﺮﺻﺔ‬LG ‫ﺍﻟﺮﻧﻴﻦ - ﻣﺎ ﻳﻮﻓﺮ ﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﻲ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ‬ .‫ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺘﺎﻉ ﺑﺘﺠﺎﺭﺏ "ﺣﻴﺎﺓ ﻣﺘﻨﻘﻠﺔ" ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﺗﻨﻮﻋ ً ﺎ‬ ‫؟‬ ‫ﻣﺎﺫﺍ ﻟﻮ ﻟﻢ ﺗﺠﺪ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ‬...
Page 103 LG SmartWorld ‫ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬ .‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ – ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﻭﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬ .‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ – ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟ ﻤ ُ ﻌﺮ ّ ﻑ ﻭﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻭﺭ‬ LG ‫ﺍﻻﺷﺘﺮﺍﻙ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﻭﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻭﻳﺠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﻬﺮﻳﺔ ﻟـ‬ • ‫• ﺟﺮﺏ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﻴﺪﺓ. )ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‬ .SmartWorld (‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻯ‬ .‫– ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻯ‬...
Page 104 ‫< ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺲ‬ < ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺒﻪ/ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ‬ .‫ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ‬ LG-P895 ‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻨ ﺒ ّﻪ، ﺳﻴﻌﻠﻤﻚ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻠﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺤﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺴﻴﻄﺔ، ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‬ .‫ﺑﺎﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺒﻘﻲ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺒﺪﺃ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺒﻪ ﺑﺎﻟﺮﻧﻴﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪﻫﺎ )+، ﺃﻭ –، ﺃﻭ ×، ﺃﻭ ÷(، ﻣﺘﺒﻮﻋﺔ‬...
Page 105 ‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺣﺪﺙ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻮﻳﻢ‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺃﺭﺩﺕ ﺗﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺒﻪ، ﻓﺎﺿﺒﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻜﺮﺍﺭ‬ .‫ﻭﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺬﻛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺩﻋﺖ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﺟﺔ‬ ‫< ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ < ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻮﻳﻢ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺲ‬ .‫ﻟﺤﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺤﺪﺙ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻮﻳﻢ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺣﻔﻆ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ، ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﻌﺜﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ‬ ‫ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻮﻳﻢ )ﺍﻟﻴﻮﻡ، ﺍﻷﺳﺒﻮﻉ، ﺍﻟﺸﻬﺮ، ﺟﺪﻭﻝ‬ ‫ﻣﻬﺎﻡ‬...
Page 106 ‫ﺍﻷﺩﻭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻋﺪﺓ‬ ‫ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻹﻧﺸﺎء ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ‬ Microsoft Exchange ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺲ‬ .‫ﺑﺮﻳﺪ ﺇﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ ﻭﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﻣﺮﻭﺭ‬ ‫ ﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﻲ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍﺗﻒ‬Polaris Office ‫ﻳﻮﻓﺮ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻮﻟﺔ ﻣﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﻣﻼﺋﻤﺔ ﻹﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ، ﻣﻦ ﺑﻴﻨﻬﺎ‬ .‫ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻬﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ‬ ‫ﻧﺴﺦ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻭﺣﺎﻓﻈﺎﺕ ﻭﻧﻘﻠﻬﺎ ﻭﻟﺼﻘﻬﺎ ﻭﺣﺬﻓﻬﺎ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ‬ Polaris Office .‫ﻣﻦ...
Page 107 ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺲ‬ ‫ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻴﺔ ﻭﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺇﺻﺪﺍﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺃﻭ‬LG ‫ﻫﻮﺍﺗﻒ‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﻣﺸﺎﺭﻛﺘﻬﺎ. ﺍﺧﺘﺮ‬ LG ‫ﺃﻧﻈﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ. ﻭﻟﺬﺍ، ﻋﻨﺪ ﺷﺮﺍء ﻫﺎﺗﻒ‬ .‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻭﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻭﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻨﺪﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪ، ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﻧﺴﺨﺔ ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﻴﺔ ﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‬ .‫ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺎﺗﻔﻚ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪ‬LG-P895 ‫ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ‬...
Page 108 ‫ﺍﻷﺩﻭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻋﺪﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﻲ ﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻫﺎﺗﻔﻚ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﻭ ﺍﻻﺳﻤﺎء ﻭﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ‬ .‫ﻭﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ‬ ‫< ﺛﻢ ﺣﺪﺩ‬ ‫< ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺲ‬ ‫• ﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﻲ ﻳﺪﻭ ﻳ ًﺎ ﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻫﺎﺗﻔﻚ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﻲ < ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﻲ < ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬ .‫ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ‬...
Page 109 ‫ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻭﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﻲ‬ ‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﻣﺮﺑﻊ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﺠﻮﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ‬ ‫ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﻧﺴﺦ ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﻲ ﻟﻬﺎ، ﺛﻢ ﺣﺪﺩ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺃﻳﻀ ً ﺎ ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬ .‫ﻣﺘﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﻹﻧﻬﺎء ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻭﻟﺔ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺎﺗﻔﻚ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ ﺗﺒ ﻌ ً ﺎ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ‬ :‫ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻭﻟﺔ...
Page 110 ‫ﺍﻷﺩﻭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻋﺪﺓ‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﻲ ﻣ ُ ﺸﻔﺮ ً ﺍ، ﻓﺎﻛﺘﺐ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ‬ ‫< ﺛﻢ ﺣﺪﺩ‬ ‫< ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺲ‬ .‫ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﻌﻴﻴﻨﻬﺎ ﻟﻠﺘﺸﻔﻴﺮ‬ .‫ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﻲ < ﺍﺳﺘﺮﺟﺎﻉ < ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ، ﺳﻮﻑ‬ ‫،...
Page 111 ‫ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ < ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ < ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻔﻴﺮ ﻭﺣﺪﺩ‬ ‫ﻣﺮﺑﻊ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ. ﻻﺳﺘﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻤﺖ‬ .‫ﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺘﻬﺎ، ﻳﺠﺐ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﻣﺮﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺸﻴﻂ‬ :‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬ ‫ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺃﻳﻀ ً ﺎ ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﻲ...
Page 112 ‫ﻭﻳﺐ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺃﺩﻭﺍﺕ ﻭﻳﺐ‬ ‫ﺇﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ‬ ‫ﻳﻮﻓﺮ ﻟﻚ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺼﻔﺢ ﻋﺎﻟﻤﺎ ً ﺳﺮﻳﻌﺎ ً ﻭﻣﺘﻨﻮﻋﺎ ً ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﻟﻌﺎﺏ‬ .‫ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﻟﻠﺮﺟﻮﻉ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ﻟﻠﺨﻠﻒ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﻟﻠﺘﻘﺪﻡ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ﻟﻸﻣﺎﻡ، ﻭﺻﻮﻻ ً ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﻭﺍﻷﺧﺒﺎﺭ ﻭﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺮﻓﻴﻪ ﻭﺍﻟﻜﺜﻴﺮ ﻏﻴﺮ‬ ً ‫ﺫﻟﻚ - ﻛﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺎﺗﻔﻚ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻮﻝ. ﺃﻳﻨﻤﺎ ﻛﻨﺖ ﻭﺃﻳﺎ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻲ...
Page 113 ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﻃﻠﺐ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﻭﻳﺐ ﺳﻄﺢ ﻣﻜﺘﺐ – ﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﻋﺮﺽ‬ .‫ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﻳﺐ ﻛﺴﻄﺢ ﻣﻜﺘﺐ‬ .‫ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺍءﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ – ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ‬ .‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺚ – ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ﻭﻳﺐ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ‬ .‫ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻘﺮﺍءﺗﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﺣﻔﻆ...
Page 114 ‫ﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻭﺩﺓ‬ ‫، ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺘﻮﺟﺐ ﻋﻠﻴﻚ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ‬MAC ‫ﺑﻌﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﺗﺼﻔﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ ﻭﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺎﺕ‬ ‫ ﻓﻲ‬LG-P895 ‫ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‬MAC ‫ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ‬ ‫ ﻭ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ. ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺃﻳﻀ ً ﺎ‬Wi-Fi ‫ﺗﺴﺘﻄﻴﻊ ﻫﻨﺎ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ‬ .‫ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺟﻴﻪ‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺷﺒﻜﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻮﻝ، ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ‬...
Page 115 .‫ﻳﻘﺪﻣﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﻗﻞ‬ ،Wi-Fi ‫ﺑﻤﺸﺎﺭﻛﺔ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻮﻟﺔ ﻋﺒﺮ‬ .‫ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻮﻟﺔ‬Wi-Fi ‫ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ‬ ‫ ﻫﻮ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﻣﺤﻤﻮﻝ‬LG-P895 ‫ – ﺇﻥ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ‬NFC ‫ )ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻻﺕ‬NFC ‫. ﺗﺸﻴﺮ‬NFC ‫ﻣﺰ ﻭ ّ ﺩ ﺑﺘﻘﻨﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﺮﻳﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻯ( ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻘﻨﻴﺔ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺗﺴﻤﺢ ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺫﻱ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺗﺠﺎﻫﻴﻦ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴﺔ. ﻭﻫﻲ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ‬...
Page 116 ‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬ ‫ – ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ﻭﻳﺐ ﺃﻭ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬Android ‫ﻣﺘﻌﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﺑﻀﻌﺔ ﺳﻨﺘﻤﺘﺮﺍﺕ. ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻣﺸﺎﺭﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺃﻭ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻯ ﺁﺧﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺘﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺁﺧﺮ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺟﻤﻊ‬ ‫ ﺃﻭ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺁﺧﺮ ﻳﺪﻋﻢ‬NFC ‫ﻟﺪﻳﻚ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ‬ .(‫ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﻣﻊ ﺑﻌﻀﻬﺎ )ﻋﺎﺩ ﺓ ً ﺍﻟﻈﻬﺮ ﻣﻘﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﻟﻈﻬﺮ‬ ‫...
Page 117 ‫ﻧﻐﻤﺔ ﺭﻧﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ – ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻧﻐﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﻧﻴﻦ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ‬ ‫ ﺃﻭ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﻣﺮﻭﺭ‬PIN ‫ﻳﺠﺐ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺭﻣﺰ‬ :‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬ .‫ﻟﻠﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩﺓ‬ .‫ﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻔﻞ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﻋﺘﻤﺎﺩ‬ ‫ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻹﺷﻌﺎﺭﺍﺕ – ﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻧﻐﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﻧﻴﻦ‬ .‫ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ ﻟﻺﺷﻌﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‬ ‫ﻧﻐﻤﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ - ﺻﺪﻭﺭ ﺍﻻﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ﻟﻠﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ‬ .‫ﻭﺍﻹﺷﻌﺎﺭﺍﺕ‬...
Page 118 ‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ – ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ‬ .‫ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺘﻔﺎﻋﻞ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻠﻤﺲ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺒﺎﻧﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻨﺰﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﺗﻼﺋﻢ ﺣﺠﻢ‬ ‫ﺃﺻﻮﺍﺕ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ – ﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻹﺻﺪﺍﺭ‬ .‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬ .‫ﺻﻮﺕ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﻗﻔﻠﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﺿﻮء ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻲ – ﺿﺒﻂ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺿﻮء ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ...
Page 119 ‫ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﻟﻚ – ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﻟﻚ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ < ‫> ﺗﺄﻣﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬ .‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻔﻞ‬ ‫ﺇﺧﺘﺮ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ – ﻟﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻟﺘﺄﻣﻴﻦ‬ ‫ﻣﺆﻗﺖ ﺍﻻﻏﻼﻕ – ﻟﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﻘﻔﻞ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻧﻘﻀﺎء ﻣﻬﻠﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ. ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻓﺘﺢ ﺷﺎﺷﺎﺕ ﺗﺮﺷﺪﻙ‬ .‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء...
Page 120 ‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬ .‫ﺗﻮﻓﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ. ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﻭﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﺻﺎﻣﺘﺔ – ﺍﻗﻠﺐ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻟﻜﺘﻢ ﺻﻮﺕ‬ .‫ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩﺓ‬ < ‫> ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺗﺄﺟﻴﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻨ ﺒ ّ ﻪ – ﺍﻗﻠﺐ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻟﺘﺄﺟﻴﻞ ﺃﻭ‬ .‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﻭﺇﺩﺍﺭﺗﻬﺎ‬ .‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺒﻪ‬ ‫ﺷﺨﺼﻲ‬...
Page 121 Micro- ‫ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬PIN ‫ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺭﻣﺰ‬USIM ‫، ﻓﺴﻴﺤﺪﺩ ﻫﺎﺗﻔﻚ‬Google ‫ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﻗﻊ ﻣﻦ‬ . USIM ‫ ﻭﺷﺒﻜﺎﺕ‬Wi-Fi ‫ﻣﻮﻗﻌﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺮﻳﺒﻲ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻮﻝ. ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ، ﻳﺘﻢ ﺳﺆﺍﻟﻚ ﺇﺫﺍ‬ ‫ﻛﺘﺎﺑﺔ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺋﻴﺔ – ﺇﻇﻬﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻑ ﺍﻷﺧﻴﺮ‬ ‫...
Page 122 ‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻨﻌﺔ - ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻋﺎﺩﺓ‬ < ‫> ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ ﻭﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺼﻨﻊ ﻭﺍﺣﺬﻑ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ ﻭﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻟﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ. ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺈﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‬ ،‫ﻫﺎﺗﻔﻚ ﻭﻟﺘﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫ﺑﻬﺬﻩ...
Page 123 :‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬ ‫ – ﺿﻊ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ‬PC Suite .‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﻗﺎﺑﻼ ً ﻟﻠﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ‬ . Wi-Fi ‫ ﻣﻊ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ‬LG PC Suite ‫ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬ ‫ ﻟـ‬Wi-Fi ‫ﻳﺮﺟﻰ ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻳﺠﺐ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ‬ < ‫> ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ‬ ‫ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ‬Wi-Fi ‫ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ‬LG PC Suite ‫...
Page 124 ‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬ ‫ ﺇﺻﺪﺍﺭ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ﺃﺣﺪﺙ‬LG ‫ﻣﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺼﺪﺭ‬ < ‫> ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‬ .‫ﻟﻠﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻧﻮﻧﻴﺔ ﻭﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‬ ‫ﺑﻤﺎ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺖ ﻳﺘﻄﻠﺐ‬ .‫ﻭﺇﺻﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‬ ،‫ﺍﻧﺘﺒﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﻃﻮﺍﻝ ﻣﺪﺓ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺚ‬...
Page 125 ‫ ﻻﺳﻠﻜ ﻴ ً ﺎ‬LG ‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻮﻝ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﻗﺪ ﺗﻔﻘﺪ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺗﻚ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ‬ :‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬ (OTA) ‫ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻲ - ﺑﻤﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﺴﺎﺏ‬ ‫ﺗﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺓ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﺻﺪﺍﺭ‬ /‫ ﻭﺃﻱ ﺣﺴﺎﺑﺎﺕ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ، ﻭﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ‬Google ‫،...
Page 126 ‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬ ‫ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ. ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺰﻳﺪ‬VOD DivX HD ‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺇﻛﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ، ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺇﻟﻰ‬ ‫ ﺃﺣﺪ‬DivX ‫: ﻳﻜﻮﻥ‬DIVX VIDEO ‫ﺣﻮﻝ‬ ® .vod.divx.com ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﻊ‬ ‫ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺅﻫﺎ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ‬ ‫ ﺣﺘﻰ‬DivX ‫ ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬DivX Certified ®...
Page 127 Dolby Mobile Dolby ‫ﺗﻢ ﺗﺼﻨﻴﻌﻪ ﺑﻤﻮﺟﺐ ﺗﺮﺧﻴﺺ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﺗﻢ ﺗﺼﻨﻴﻌﻪ ﺑﻤﻮﺟﺐ ﺗﺮﺧﻴﺺ ﺑﻤﻮﺟﺐ ﺑﺮﺍءﺍﺕ‬ ‫ ﻭﺭﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ‬Laboratories. Dolby ‫ﺍﻻﺧﺘﺮﺍﻉ ﺍﻷﻣﺮﻳﻜﻴﺔ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ: 476,659,5؛‬ Dolby ‫ ﻫﻤﺎ ﻋﻼﻣﺘﺎﻥ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳﺘﺎﻥ ﻟـ‬D ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺣﺮﻓﺎ‬ ‫083,479,5؛ 535,784,6 ﻭﺑﺮﺍءﺍﺕ ﺍﺧﺘﺮﺍﻉ‬ .Laboratories ‫ﺃﻣﺮﻳﻜﻴﺔ ﻭﻋﺎﻟﻤﻴﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺗﻢ ﺇﺻﺪﺍﺭﻫﺎ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺎ ﺯﺍﻟﺖ‬ ‫...
Page 128 .‫ﻓﻮﻕ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻲ‬ .‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻮﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺃﻭ ﻓﺼﻠﻪ ﻣﻨﻪ‬ ‫• ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ: ﺗﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻚ ﻫﺬﻩ‬ ‫ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺗﻔﻀﻴﻼﺕ‬LG Home Panorama ‫ﻟﺒﺪء‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺓ ﺑﺈﻧﺸﺎء ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻧﺼﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬ .On-Screen Phone .‫ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬...
Page 129 ‫• ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ )ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻲ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‬ ‫ﺍﻧﺘﻘﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺪﻋﻢ < ﺩﻋﻢ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻮﻝ < ﺣﺪﺩ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻮﻝ(: ﺗﺴﻤﺢ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺓ ﺑﺈﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ‬ OSP ‫( < ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ‬LG-P895) ‫ﺍﻟﻄﺮﺍﺯ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻲ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻮﻝ. ﻣﺎ ﻋﻠﻴﻚ‬ ‫ ﻟﻠﺘﻨﺰﻳﻞ. ﻋﻨﺪﻫﺎ ﻳﺼﺒﺢ‬On-Screen Phone) ) ‫ﺇﻻ...
Page 130 ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬ .(‫. )ﻗﺪ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻭﺭﺩ ﻭﺻﻔﻬﺎ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬LG-P895 ‫ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ ﻣﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ ﻟﻼﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ‬ ‫ﻣﺸﺒﻚ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ‬ ‫ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺔ ﺭﺃﺱ‬ ‫ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺴﻔﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺮﻳﻮ‬ Micro- USIM LG Tag+ ‫ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻋﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ‬ LG-P895 ‫ﻫﺎﺗﻒ‬ ‫ﺣﻮﻝ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ‬ .‫ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬...
Page 131 .‫. ﻳ ُﺮﺟﻰ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻹﺻﺒﻊ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮ‬Rubberdium ‫ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮ: ﻻ ﺗﻠﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﺤﻮﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﺩﺓ ﺑﻘﻮﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻔﺮﻛﻬﺎ‬ :‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬ .‫ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻴﺔ‬LG ‫• ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺩﺍﺋﻤﺎ ً ﻣﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬ .‫• ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﺬﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﺑﻄﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻜﻔﺎﻟﺔ‬ .‫• ﻭﻗﺪ ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‬...
Page 132 ‫ﺍﺳﺘﻜﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻷﺧﻄﺎء ﻭﺇﺻﻼﺣﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﻳﺴﺮﺩ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻞ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺎﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻗﺪ ﺗﺼﺎﺩﻓﻬﺎ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ. ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺎﻛﻞ ﻳﺘﻄﻠﺐ ﻣﻨﻚ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ‬ .‫ﺑﻤﻮﻓﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ، ﻭﻟﻜﻦ ﻣﻌﻈﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺎﻛﻞ ﺳﻬﻠﺔ ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺤﻬﺎ ﺑﻨﻔﺴﻚ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺪﺍﺑﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﺤﻴﺤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻤﻜﻨﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺳﺒﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻤﻠﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ‬ ‫ ﻓﻲ‬Micro-USIM ‫ﻻ ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬ ‫ ﺑﺎﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ‬Micro-USIM ‫ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬ Micro- ‫ﺧﻄﺄ‬...
Page 133 ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺪﺍﺑﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﺤﻴﺤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻤﻜﻨﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺳﺒﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻤﻠﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺟ ّ ﻪ ﻧﺤﻮ ﻧﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﺃﻭ ﻧﺤﻮ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﻣﻔﺘﻮﺡ. ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺧﺮﻳﻄﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺿﻌﻴﻔﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻧﻚ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ‬ .‫ﺗﻐﻄﻴﺔ ﻣﺸﻐﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‬ .‫ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﻗﻞ‬ ‫ﻻ ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ/ ﻓﻘﺪﺍﻥ‬ ‫ ﺃﻗﺪﻡ ﻣﻦ‬Micro-USIM ‫ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻤﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‬...
Page 134 ‫ﺍﺳﺘﻜﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻷﺧﻄﺎء ﻭﺇﺻﻼﺣﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺪﺍﺑﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﺤﻴﺤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻤﻜﻨﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺳﺒﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻤﻠﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ‬ ‫ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺭﻣﺰ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻥ، ﻋﻠﻴﻚ ﺗﺄﻛﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ‬ .‫ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪ ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﺑﺈﺩﺧﺎﻟﻪ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ ﻏﻴﺮ‬ .‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻓﻘﺪﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ، ﻓﺎﺗﺼﻞ ﺑﻤﻮﻓﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﺘﻄﺎﺑﻘﺔ‬ ‫ﺇﻥ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺬﻳﻦ ﺃﺩﺧﻠﺘﻬﻤﺎ ﻻ‬ .‫ﻳﺘﻄﺎﺑﻘﺎﻥ‬ ‫ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻗ ِ ﺒﻞ ﻣﻮﻓﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﻻ...
Page 135 ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺪﺍﺑﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﺤﻴﺤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻤﻜﻨﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺳﺒﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻤﻠﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ‬ .‫ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺼﺮ ّ ﺡ ﻟﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﺧﻄﺄ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻄﻠﺐ‬ Micro-USIM ‫ﺗﻢ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬ .‫ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﻏﻴﺮ‬ .‫ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ‬ ‫ﻣﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ‬ ‫ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻓﻮﻉ‬ .PIN2 ‫ﺍﺗﺼﻞ ﺑﻤﻮﻓﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻋﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ‬ .‫ﻣﻘﺪ...
Page 136 .‫ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻳﺠﺮﻱ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻓﻲ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻳﺔ‬ . ً ‫ﺟﺪﺍ ً ﺃﻭ ﻣﺘﺪﻧﻴﺔ ﺟﺪﺍ‬ .‫ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺣﻦ ﻭﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‬ ‫ﻣﺸﻜﻠﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﺧﻄﺄ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ‬ .‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺣﻦ ﺑﻤﻘﺒﺲ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ‬ ‫ﻻ ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﻓﻮﻟﺘﻴﺔ‬ .‫ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺣﻦ‬ ‫ﺧﻠﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺣﻦ‬ .‫ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻴﺔ ﻓﻘﻂ‬LG ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺣﻦ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ‬...
Page 137 ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺪﺍﺑﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﺤﻴﺤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻤﻜﻨﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺳﺒﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻤﻠﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ‬ ‫ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ ﻗﻴﺪ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ ﻏﻴﺮ‬ .‫ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ. ﻭﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‬ .‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﻣﺴﻤﻮﺡ ﺑﻪ‬ ‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﻼﻡ‬ ‫/ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ‬ .‫ﺍﺣﺬﻑ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‬ ‫ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻣﻤﺘﻠﺌﺔ‬ SMS ‫ﺭﺳﺎﺋﻞ‬ ‫ﻭﺻﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻌﺬﺭ ﻓﺘﺢ‬ .‫ﺗﺤﻘﻖ...
Page 138 ‫ﺍﺳﺘﻜﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻷﺧﻄﺎء ﻭﺇﺻﻼﺣﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺪﺍﺑﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﺤﻴﺤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻤﻜﻨﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺳﺒﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻤﻠﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺷﺮﻳﻄﺎ ً ﺃﻭ ﻏﻄﺎ ء ً ﻟﻠﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ، ﻓﺘﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻧﻪ‬ ‫ﻻ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬ .‫ﻻ ﻳﻐﻄﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺣﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻴﻄﺔ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﺳﺘﺸﻌﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﺷﻴﺎء ﺍﻟﻘﺮﻳﺒﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﺸﻜﻠﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﺳﺘﺸﻌﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﺷﻴﺎء‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺃﺗﻠﻘﻰ‬ ‫ﺗﺄﻛﺪ...
Page 139 ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺪﺍﺑﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﺤﻴﺤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻤﻜﻨﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺳﺒﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻤﻠﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻖ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺠ ﻤ ّ ﺪ‬ .‫ﺣﺎﻭﻝ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻋﺒﺮ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﻭﻳﺐ‬ ‫ﻣﺸﻜﻠﺔ ﻣﺘﻘﻄﻌﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬...
Page 141 ‫ﻭ‬ LG .‫. ﮐﻠﻴﻪ ﺣﻘﻮﻕ ﻣﺤﻔﻮﻅ ﺍﺳﺖ‬LG Electronics، Inc 2012© ‫ﺣﻖ ﮐﭙﯽ‬ • .‫ ﻭ ﺷﺮﮐﺖ ﻫﺎی ﻭﺍﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﻣﯽ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‬LG Group ‫ ﻋﻼﺋﻢ ﺗﺠﺎﺭی ﺛﺒﺖ ﺷﺪﻩ‬LG ‫ﺁﺭﻡ‬ .‫ﺳﺎﻳﺮ ﻋﻼﺋﻢ ﺗﺠﺎﺭی ﺗﺤﺖ ﻣﺎﻟﮑﻴﺖ ﺻﺎﺣﺒﺎﻥ ﺁﻥ ﻫﺎ ﻣﯽ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‬ ‫ﻭ‬ Talk™ ‫™، ﮔﻮﮔﻞ‬Maps™، Gmail™، YouTube ‫ﮔﻮﮔﻞ، ﮔﻮﮔﻞ‬...
Page 142 ‫ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﻣﻄﺎﻟﺐ‬ 46 ..‫ﺑﺎﺯﮔﺸﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺧﻴﺮ‬ 7 ....‫ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﻫﺎی ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﻳﻤﻦ ﻭ ﻣﺆﺛﺮ‬ 46 ........‫ﻧﻮﺍﺭ ﺍﻋﻼﻥ ﻫﺎ‬ 20 ......‫ﺁﺷﻨﺎﻳﯽ ﺑﺎ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ‬ 47 ......‫ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻧﻮﺍﺭ ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺖ‬ 33 ........‫ﺍﺟﺰﺍ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ‬ 50 ......‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﮐﻠﻴﺪ ﺭﻭی ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‬ 37 ..........
Page 143 71 ..........‫ﺍﺳﺎﻣﯽ‬ 60 .......Wi-Fi Cast ‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ‬ ‫ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﺷﺘﺮﺍک‬Wi-Fi Direct ‫ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ‬ 71 ....... ‫ﺟﺴﺘﺠﻮی ﻣﺨﺎﻃﺐ‬ 60 .....SmartShare ‫ﮔﺬﺍﺭی ﺍﺯ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ‬ 71 ......‫ﺍﻓﺰﻭﺩﻥ ﻣﺨﺎﻃﺐ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ‬ 61 ....SmartShare ‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ‬ 72 ......‫ﻣﺨﺎﻃﺒﻴﻦ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻋﻼﻗﻪ‬ 72 ‫ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﻣﺨﺎﻃﺒﻴﻦ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻗﺒﻠﯽ ﺑﻪ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ‬ 66 ..........
Page 144 96 ......‫ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﯽ‬ 87 ........ ‫ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻓﻴﻠﻤﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی‬ ‫ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎی ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﯽ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻫﺎی‬ 96 ......USB ‫ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺍﻧﺒﻮﻩ‬ 87 ......... ‫ﺁﺷﻨﺎﻳﯽ ﺑﺎ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺎﺏ‬ 97 ........‫ﭘﺨﺶ ﺁﻫﻨﮓ‬ 88 ....... ‫ﻓﻴﻠﻤﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﻓﻮﺭی‬ 99 ........+LG Tag 88 .......‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﻓﻴﻠﻤﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی‬...
Page 145 101 ....... ‫ﺁﺷﻨﺎﻳﯽ ﺑﺎ ﺩﻓﺘﺮ ﻳﺎﺩﺩﺍﺷﺖ‬ 111 ..‫ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺭﻳﺰی ﺗﻬﻴﻪ ﭘﺸﺘﻴﺒﺎﻥ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ‬ 112 .....‫ﺑﺎﺯﻳﺎﺑﯽ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻫﺎی ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ﻫﻮﺷﻤﻨﺪ‬ 103 ......LG SmartWorld 103 ‫ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ‬LG SmartWorld ‫ﻧﺤﻮﻩ ﺭﻓﺘﻦ ﺑﻪ‬ 115 ..........‫ﻭﺏ‬ 104 ..LG SmartWorld ‫ﻧﺤﻮﻩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ‬ 115 ......... ‫ﺍﻳﻨﺘﺮﻧﺖ‬...
Page 146 128 ....‫ﺑﻪ ﺭﻭﺯﺁﻭﺭی ﻧﺮﻡ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ‬ 130 ........DivX HD 131 ........DTS 132 ......Dolby Mobile 133 ....LG On-Screen Phone 133 ...On-Screen Phone ‫ﻧﻤﺎﺩﻫﺎی‬ 133 ..On-Screen Phone ‫ﻭﻳﮋﮔﯽ ﻫﺎی‬ On-Screen Phone ‫ﻧﺤﻮﻩ ﻧﺼﺐ‬ 135 ........‫ﺩﺭ ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ‬...
Page 147 .(SAR) ‫ﺭﺍﺩﻳﻮﻳﯽ ﻭ ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﺟﺬﺏ ﻭﻳﮋﻩ‬ ‫ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺮﻳﻦ ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﻧﻴﺮﻭی ﺗﺄﻳﻴﺪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ﮐﻠﻴﻪ‬ ‫ ﺑﻪ ﮔﻮﻧﻪ ﺍی‬LG-P895 ‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ ﻣﺪﻝ‬ .‫ﺑﺎﻧﺪﻫﺎی ﻓﺮﮐﺎﻧﺲ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ، ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺍﺳﺖ‬ ‫ﻃﺮﺍﺣﯽ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ﮐﻪ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ﻣﻘﺮﺭﺍﺕ ﻭ ﺷﺮﺍﻳﻂ ﻻﺯﻡ‬...
Page 148 ‫ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﻫﺎی ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﻳﻤﻦ ﻭ ﻣﺆﺛﺮ‬ ‫ﻋﺎﺩی ﺭﻭی ﮔﻮﺵ ﻳﺎ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﺩﺭ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ‬ ‫ﮐﻪ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﻫﺎی ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﺩﺭ‬ ‫5.1 ﺳﺎﻧﺘﯽ ﻣﺘﺮی ﺍﺯ ﺑﺪﻥ ﺗﺒﻌﻴﺖ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ. ﺍﮔﺮ ﺍﺯ‬ .‫ﻣﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻣﻮﺍﺝ ﺭﺍﺩﻳﻮﻳﯽ ﺩﺭ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺭﻋﺎﻳﺖ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬ ،‫ﺟﻠﺪ،...
Page 149 ‫ﻣﺮﺍﻗﺒﺖ ﻭ ﻧﮕﻬﺪﺍﺭی ﺍﺯ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺖ ﭘﻮﺷﺶ‬ LG ‫ﺗﻌﻤﻴﺮﺍﺗﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻼﺣﺪﻳﺪ‬ • ‫ﺿﻤﺎﻧﺖ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺗﻨﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻌﻤﻴﺮ ﻳﺎ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ‬ ‫ﻗﻄﻌﺎﺕ ﻳﺎ ﺑﻮﺭﺩﻫﺎ ﺑﺎ ﻗﻄﻌﺎﺕ ﻳﺎ ﺑﻮﺭﺩﻫﺎی ﺟﺪﻳﺪ، ﺑﻪ‬ ‫ﻫﺸﺪﺍﺭ‬ ‫ﺷﺮﻃﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺍﺯ ﻟﺤﺎﻅ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩی ﺑﺎ ﻗﻄﻌﺎﺕ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ‬ ‫ﻓﻘﻂ ﺍﺯ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﻫﺎ، ﺷﺎﺭژﺭﻫﺎ ﻭ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﺟﺎﻧﺒﯽ‬...
Page 150 ‫ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﻫﺎی ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﻳﻤﻦ ﻭ ﻣﺆﺛﺮ‬ ‫• ﺍﺯ ﭘﺎﺭﭼﻪ ﺧﺸﮏ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺗﻤﻴﺰ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺳﻄﻮﺡ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﯽ‬ ‫• ﺩﺭ ﻣﮑﺎﻥ ﻫﺎﻳﯽ ﮐﻪ ﻗﻮﺍﻧﻴﻦ ﻭﻳﮋﻩ ﺍی ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺏ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‬ ً ‫ﮐﻪ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻫﻤﺮﺍ ﻩ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﻧﮕﻪ ﺩﺍﺭﻳﺪ، ﺣﺘﻤﺎ‬ ‫ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ )ﺍﺯ ﻣﺤﻠﻮﻟﻬﺎی ﭘﺎک ﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ‬ ‫ﮔﻮﺷﯽ...
Page 151 ‫• ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻳﮏ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﮑﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴﮑﯽ ﺍﺳﺖ ﮐﻪ ﺩﺭ‬ ،‫• ﺑﺎ ﻭﺳﺎﻳﻞ ﻧﻮک ﺗﻴﺰ ﺭﻭی ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﻧﺰﻧﻴﺪ‬ ‫ﺣﻴﻦ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ ﻋﺎﺩی، ﮔﺮﻣﺎ ﺗﻮﻟﻴﺪ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ. ﺗﻤﺎﺱ‬ .‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﮐﺎﺭ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺁﺳﻴﺐ ﻣﯽ ﺭﺳﺎﻧﺪ‬ ‫ﻃﻮﻻﻧﯽ ﻭ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ﺑﺎ ﭘﻮﺳﺖ ﻭ ﻋﺪﻡ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺗﻬﻮﻳﻪ‬ ‫•...
Page 152 ‫ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﻫﺎی ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﻳﻤﻦ ﻭ ﻣﺆﺛﺮ‬ ‫• ﺑﺮﺧﯽ ﺍﺯ ﻭﺳﺎﻳﻞ ﮐﻤﮏ ﺷﻨﻮﺍﻳﯽ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺩﺭ ﺍﺛﺮ‬ ‫• ﻣﺎﻳﻊ ﺩﺭﻭﻥ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺧﻴﺲ ﺷﺪﻩ، ﺭﻧﮓ ﺑﺮﭼﺴﺐ‬ .‫ﻣﺠﺎﻭﺭﺕ ﺑﺎ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻫﺎی ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ ﺩﭼﺎﺭ ﺍﺧﺘﻼﻝ ﮔﺮﺩﻧﺪ‬ ‫ﻣﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﺩﺭ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ. ﺁﺳﻴﺐ‬ ‫ﺑﻪ...
Page 153 ‫ﺍﻳﻤﻨﯽ ﺟﺎﺩﻩ‬ ‫• ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺧﻮﺩﺭﻭ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﺠﻬﺰ ﺑﻪ ﮐﻴﺴﻪ ﻫﻮﺍ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺖ، ﺑﺎ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﻧﺼﺐ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻳﺎ ﺑﯽ ﺳﻴﻢ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ‬ ‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺭﺍﻧﻨﺪﮔﯽ ﻗﻮﺍﻧﻴﻦ ﻭ ﻣﻘﺮﺭﺍﺕ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ‬ ‫ﺣﻤﻞ، ﻣﺎﻧﻌﯽ ﺑﺮ ﺳﺮ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺁﻥ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻧﺪﻫﻴﺪ. ﺯﻳﺮﺍ‬ .‫ﺍﺯ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻮﺍﺣﯽ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻋﺎﻳﺖ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‬ ‫ﻣﻤﮑﻦ...
Page 154 ‫ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﻫﺎی ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﻳﻤﻦ ﻭ ﻣﺆﺛﺮ‬ ‫ﺻﺪﺍ ﺭﺍ ﺁﻥ ﻗﺪﺭ ﺯﻳﺎﺩ ﻧﮑﻨﻴﺪ ﮐﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻨﻮﺍﻳﯽ‬ ‫ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﺻﺪﺍی ﺯﻳﺎﺩ ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ﻫﺎ ﻭ ﻫﺪﻓﻮﻥ ﻫﺎ‬ :‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ‬ ‫ﺷﻤﺎ ﺁﺳﻴﺐ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﺷﻮﺩ‬ .‫ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻨﻮﺍﻳﯽ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺁﺳﻴﺐ ﺑﺮﺳﺎﻧﺪ‬ ‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻣﺪﺗﯽ ﻃﻮﻻﻧﯽ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻌﺮﺽ ﺻﺪﺍی ﺑﻠﻨﺪ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ‬ ‫ﻗﻄﻌﺎﺕ...
Page 155 ‫ﻧﺎﺣﻴﻪ ﺍﻧﻔﺠﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﮐﻪ ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ ﻳﺎ ﻟﻮﺍﺯﻡ ﺟﺎﻧﺒﯽ ﺁﻥ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‬ .‫ﺧﻮﺩﺩﺍﺭی ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‬ ‫ﺍﺯ ﮐﺎﺭﺑﺮﺩ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺤﻞ ﻫﺎﻳﯽ ﮐﻪ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻧﻔﺠﺎﺭ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻝ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺧﻮﺩﺩﺍﺭی ﮐﻨﻴﺪ. ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩﻳﺖ‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﻫﻮﺍﭘﻴﻤﺎ‬ ‫ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻋﺎﻳﺖ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺍﺯ ﮐﻠﻴﻪ ﻗﻮﺍﻧﻴﻦ ﻭ ﻣﻘﺮﺭﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ...
Page 156 ‫ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﻫﺎی ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﻳﻤﻦ ﻭ ﻣﺆﺛﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﻭ ﻣﺮﺍﻗﺒﺖ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻥ‬ ‫ﮐﻮﺩﮐﺎﻥ‬ ‫• ﻻﺯﻡ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ ﺷﺎﺭژ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﮐﺎﻣﻼ ﺧﺎﻟﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺗﺎ ﺁﻥ‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻣﮑﺎﻧﯽ ﺍﻣﻦ ﺩﻭﺭ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺱ ﮐﻮﺩﮐﺎﻥ‬ ‫ﺭﺍ ﻣﺠﺪﺩﺍ ﺷﺎﺭژ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ. ﺑﺮﺧﻼﻑ ﺳﺎﻳﺮ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻫﺎی‬ ‫ﺧﺮﺩﺳﺎﻝ...
Page 157 LG ‫ﻓﻘﻂ ﺍﺯ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﻫﺎ ﻭ ﺷﺎﺭژﺭﻫﺎی‬ • ‫ﺧﻮﺭﺷﻴﺪ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻥ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺤﻴﻂ ﻫﺎی ﺑﺴﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫ ﺑﻪ ﮔﻮﻧﻪ ﺍی ﻃﺮﺍﺣﯽ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﻧﺪ ﮐﻪ‬LG ‫ﺷﺎﺭژﺭﻫﺎی‬ .‫ﻣﺮﻃﻮﺏ ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﺣﻤﺎﻡ ﻭ ﺍﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﺁﻥ ﺧﻮﺩﺩﺍﺭی ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‬ .‫ﻋﻤﺮ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺣﺪﺍﮐﺜﺮ ﺑﺮﺳﺎﻧﻨﺪ‬...
Page 158 ‫ﮐﻤﮏ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻧﺰﺩﻳﮑﺘﺮﻳﻦ ﻣﺮﮐﺰ ﻓﺮﻭﺵ ﻳﺎ ﻣﺮﮐﺰ‬ ‫ ﺍﻋﻼﻡ ﻣﯽ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﻪ‬LG Electronics ،‫ﺑﺪﻳﻨﻮﺳﻴﻠﻪ‬ .‫ ﺑﺒﺮﻳﺪ‬LG Electronics ‫ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﻣﺠﺎﺯ‬ ‫ ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﺑﺎ ﻧﻴﺎﺯﻣﻨﺪی ﻫﺎ ﻭ‬LG-P895 ‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﺤﺼﻮﻝ‬ ‫• ﻫﻤﻴﺸﻪ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺷﺎﺭژ ﺷﺪﻥ ﮐﺎﻣﻞ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ، ﺑﻪ ﻣﻨﻈﻮﺭ‬ ‫ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ. ﻳﮏ‬EC/1999/5 ‫ﺍﺻﻮﻝ ﻣﺎﺩﻩ‬...
Page 159 ‫ﻧﺮﻡ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ ﻣﻨﺒﻊ ﺁﺯﺍﺩ‬ :‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ‬ ‫ﺩﻣﺎﻫﺎی ﻣﺤﻴﻂ‬ GPL، ‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺩﺳﺘﻴﺎﺑﯽ ﺑﻪ ﮐﺪ ﻣﻨﺒﻊ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻃﻪ ﺩﺭ‬ ،(‫ﺣﺪﺍﮐﺜﺮ: 05+ ﺩﺭﺟﻪ ﺳﺎﻧﺘﯽ ﮔﺮﺍﺩ )ﺩﺷﺎﺭژ‬ ‫ ﻭ ﺳﺎﻳﺮ ﻣﺠﻮﺯﻫﺎی ﻣﻨﺒﻊ ﺁﺯﺍﺩ، ﻟﻄﻔﺎ‬LGPL، MPL (‫54+ ﺩﺭﺟﻪ ﺳﺎﻧﺘﯽ ﮔﺮﺍﺩ )ﺷﺎﺭژ‬ :‫ﺍﺯ ﺳﺎﻳﺖ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺩﻳﺪﻥ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻳﻴﺪ‬ ‫ﺣﺪﺍﻗﻞ: 01- ﺩﺭﺟﻪ ﺳﺎﻧﺘﯽ ﮔﺮﺍﺩ‬ http://opensource.lge.com ‫ﻫﻤﻪ...
Page 160 ‫ﺁﺷﻨﺎﻳﯽ ﺑﺎ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ‬ !‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﺑﻪ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ، ﻟﻄﻔﺎ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻄﻠﺐ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺨﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ‬ :‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﻟﻐﻮ ﻧﺼﺐ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎ‬ ‫ﻟﻄﻔﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺮﮐﺰ ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﻣﻮﺑﺎﻳﻞ ﻳﺎ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ‬ ‫ﺑﺎ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻨﺪﮔﯽ ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ، ﺑﺮﺭﺳﯽ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﮐﻪ ﺍﺷﮑﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ‬ ‫<...
Page 161 :‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺑﺮﺭﺳﯽ ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﺷﺎﺭژ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی‬ ‫ﮐﻨﻴﺪ. ﻫﻤﭽﻨﻴﻦ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻧﺤﻮﻩ ﻣﺼﺮﻑ ﻧﻴﺮﻭی ﺑﺎﺗﺮی‬ .‫ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎ ﻭ ﻣﻨﺎﺑﻊ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺭﺍ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‬ ‫ﺩﺭﺑﺎﺭﻩ‬ < ‫< ﺯﺑﺎﻧﻪ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎ < ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ‬ • ‫ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺍﺯ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ < ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‬ :‫ﺍﻓﺰﺍﻳﺶ ﻃﻮﻝ ﻋﻤﺮ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺗﻠﻔﻦ‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺖ...
Page 162 ‫ﺁﺷﻨﺎﻳﯽ ﺑﺎ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ‬ ‫4. ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﻧﺼﺐ ﻳﮏ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻣﻨﺒﻊ ﺁﺯﺍﺩ ﻭ‬ ‫ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ. ﻳﺎ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺑﻪ ﺑﺮﻕ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﺍﺳﺖ، ﻣﺪﺕ‬ ‫ﺯﻣﺎﻧﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺷﺎﺭژ ﻣﺠﺪﺩ ﺍﺯ ﻧﻴﺮﻭی ﺑﺎﺗﺮی‬ ‫ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻋﺎﻣﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻧﻤﻮﺩﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺭﺍ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ. ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ‬ ‫ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ...
Page 163 ‫ﻗﻔﻞ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ < ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻗﻔﻞ‬ ‫ﻫﺸﺪﺍﺭ‬ ‫< ﺍﻟﮕﻮ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ. ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺍی ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﺯ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‬ ‫ﺑﻪ ﻣﻨﻈﻮﺭ ﺣﻔﺎﻇﺖ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻫﺎی ﺷﺨﺼﯽ‬ ‫ﮐﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺩﺭ ﻧﺤﻮﻩ ﺗﺮﺳﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﮕﻮی ﺑﺎﺯﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻗﻔﻞ ﮐﻤﮏ‬ ‫ﺧﻮﺩ،...
Page 164 ‫ﺁﺷﻨﺎﻳﯽ ﺑﺎ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ‬ ‫ ﻳﺎ ﺭﻣﺰ ﻭﺭﻭﺩ ﺑﺎﺯ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻳﺎﺩ‬PIN ،‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﺍﻟﮕﻮ‬ ‫ﻫﺸﺪﺍﺭ‬ :‫ﻧﻤﯽ ﺁﻭﺭﻳﺪ‬ .‫ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻁ ﻫﺎی ﻻﺯﻡ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﮕﻮی ﻗﻔﻞ‬ <‫>ﺍﮔﺮ ﺍﻟﮕﻮ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺮﺍﻣﻮﺵ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﺍﻳﺪ‬ ‫ﺑﺴﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﻬﻢ ﺍﺳﺖ ﮐﻪ ﺍﻟﮕﻮی ﺑﺎﺯ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺷﺪﻩ‬ ‫ﺍﮔﺮ...
Page 165 .‫ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻭ ﻧﮕﻬﺪﺍﺭﻳﺪ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺯ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺮﺍﻣﻮﺵ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﺍﻳﺪ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﮐﺪ ﭘﻴﻦ‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﺷﺪ، ﻫﻤﻪ‬ LG ‫ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﺁﺭﻡ‬ .‫ﭘﺸﺘﻴﺒﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‬ .‫ﮐﻠﻴﺪﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻫﺎ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‬ ‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﭼﻨﺪ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ، ﺍﻣﮑﺎﻥ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺑﺎﺯﻧﺸﺎﻧﯽ ﮐﺎﺭﺧﺎﻧﻪ‬...
Page 166 ‫ﺁﺷﻨﺎﻳﯽ ﺑﺎ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ‬ ‫7. ﺑﺎﺯ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻭ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎ‬ ‫ﺑﺎ ﮐﻠﻴﺪﻫﺎی ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﺻﺪﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ﺣﺮﮐﺖ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ‬ .‫ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﮐﻠﻴﺪ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ/ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ/ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‬ ‫ﻭﻇﺎﻳﻒ ﭼﻨﺪﮔﺎﻧﻪ ﻳﮏ ﻭﻳﮋﮔﯽ ﺍﺳﺖ ﮐﻪ ﺑﺎ ﺁﻧﺪﺭﻭﻳﺪ ﺁﺳﺎﻥ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺖ ﺯﻳﺮﺍ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺍی ﺍﺟﺮﺍ‬ ‫ﻫﺸﺪﺍﺭ‬...
Page 167 :‫ﺍﺧﻴﺮ‬ (Suite ‫ﮐﺎﻓﯽ ﺍﺳﺖ ﮐﻠﻴﺪ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺍﺧﻴﺮ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‬ ‫" ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺍی ﺍﺳﺖ‬LG PC Suite" ‫ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ‬ :‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺗﻮﻗﻒ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎ‬ ‫ﮐﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺍﻣﮑﺎﻥ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﻳﮏ‬ ‫< ﺯﺑﺎﻧﻪ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎ < ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ < ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎ‬...
Page 168 ‫• ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻫﺎ )ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺯﻣﺎﻧﯽ، ﻣﺨﺎﻃﺒﻴﻦ، ﻣﺤﻞ ﻳﺎﺏ‬ .‫ﻫﺎ( ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻭ ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ ﻫﻤﮕﺎﻡ ﺳﺎﺯی ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‬ ‫" ﺭﺍ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ‬LG PC Suite" ‫ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ ﺍی‬ .‫ ﺑﺎﺭﮔﻴﺮی ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‬LG ‫ﺍﺯ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻭﺏ‬ .‫• ﺍﺯ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺧﻮﺩ ﭘﺸﺘﻴﺒﺎﻥ ﺗﻬﻴﻪ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‬...
Page 169 :‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ‬ Vista 32 bit/64 bit، Windows 7 ‫ ﺑﺎ ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ، ﺩﺭﺍﻳﻮﺭ‬LG ‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ‬ 32 bit/64 bit ‫ ﻻﺯﻡ ﺍﺳﺖ. ﺑﺎ ﻧﺼﺐ ﻧﺮﻡ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ‬LG ‫ ﺩﺍﺧﻠﯽ‬USB ‫ﮔﻴﮕﺎﻫﺮﺗﺰ ﻳﺎ ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺮ‬ 1 ‫: ﭘﺮﺩﺍﺯﻧﺪﻩ‬CPU • ‫"، ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﺭﺍﻳﻮﺭ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ‬LG PC Suite" ‫ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ‬...
Page 170 ‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﻫﻤﮕﺎﻡ ﺳﺎﺯی ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺑﻮﺳﻴﻠﻪ ﮐﺎﺑﻞ‬ :‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ‬ (.‫ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‬Wi-Fi ‫ ﻳﺎ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ‬USB ‫ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ‬LG PC suite ‫ ﺑﺎ ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ، ﺑﺎﻳﺪ‬USB ‫ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ، ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺟﺮﺍ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺭﺍ‬ .‫ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ ﻧﺼﺐ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‬ .‫ﺍﺯ ﮔﺮﻭﻩ ﺳﻤﺖ ﭼﭗ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‬...
Page 171 ‫ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ، ﮐﻪ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﻤﮕﺎﻡ ﺳﺎﺯی ﺭﺳﺎﻧﻪ ﻫﺎ‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻣﻌﻤﻮﻟﯽ ﺻﺎﻑ ﻭ ﻋﻤﻮﺩ‬ .‫( ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‬MTP) ‫ ﻣﺠﻬﺰ ﺑﻪ ﻳﮏ ﺁﻧﺘﻦ ﺩﺍﺧﻠﯽ‬LG-P895 .‫ﻧﮕﻬﺪﺍﺭﻳﺪ‬ ‫ﭘﻮﺷﻪ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ ﺑﺎﺯ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ. ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺖ. ﺩﻗﺖ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﭘﺸﺖ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺧﺮﺍﺵ ﻧﺪﻫﻴﺪ ﻳﺎ ﺑﻪ‬...
Page 172 ‫ﺁﺷﻨﺎﻳﯽ ﺑﺎ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ‬ ‫ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻫﺎ، ﺳﻌﯽ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺑﻪ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻨﯽ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻳﻌﻨﯽ ﻗﺴﻤﺘﯽ‬ ‫ﮐﻪ ﺁﻧﺘﻦ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﺩﺳﺖ ﻧﺰﻧﻴﺪ. ﺯﻳﺮﺍ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ‬ .‫ﺭﻭی ﮐﻴﻔﻴﺖ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺗﺎﺛﻴﺮ ﺑﮕﺬﺍﺭﺩ‬ ‫21. ﺍﮔﺮ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ﺷﻮﺩ‬ ‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻳﺎ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﮐﺎﺭ ﺑﺎ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ، ﺗﻠﻔﻦ‬ :‫ﭘﺎﺳﺦ...
Page 173 ‫ﺍﺟﺰﺍ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ‬ ‫ﮐﻠﻴﺪ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ/ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ/ﻗﻔﻞ‬ ‫ﺑﻠﻨﺪﮔﻮ‬ ،‫• ﺑﺎ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﻭ ﻧﮕﻬﺪﺍﺷﺘﻦ ﺍﻳﻦ ﮐﻠﻴﺪ‬ ‫ﺣﺴﮕﺮ ﻧﻮﺭی‬ .‫ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ/ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‬ ‫ﻟﻨﺰ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ‬ ‫• ﺑﺮﺍی ﻗﻔﻞ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ/ﺑﺎﺯ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‬ .‫ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ، ﻣﺨﺘﺼﺮﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‬ ‫ﮐﻠﻴﺪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ‬ ‫ﮐﻠﻴﺪ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺍﺧﻴﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﺯ ﻫﺮ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺍی ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‬ ‫ﻟﻴﺴﺖ...
Page 174 ‫ﺁﺷﻨﺎﻳﯽ ﺑﺎ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ‬ ‫ﺣﺴﮕﺮ ﻧﻮﺭی‬ :‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ‬ ‫ﻫﺸﺪﺍﺭ‬ ‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺖ ﻳﺎ ﺑﺮﻗﺮﺍﺭی ﺗﻤﺎﺱ، ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺩﺭ‬ ‫ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﻳﮏ ﺟﺴﻢ ﺳﻨﮕﻴﻦ ﺭﻭی ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ﻳﺎ ﻧﺸﺴﺘﻦ‬ ‫ﮐﻨﺎﺭ ﮔﻮﺵ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﻩ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ، ﺣﺴﮕﺮ ﻧﻮﺭی ﺑﻪ‬ LCD ‫ﺭﻭی ﺁﻥ، ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﺎﻋﺚ ﺁﺳﻴﺐ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‬ ‫ﻃﻮﺭ...
Page 175 ‫ﮐﻠﻴﺪ ﻓﻮﺭی ﻳﺎﺩﺩﺍﺷﺖ‬ ‫ﮐﻠﻴﺪﻫﺎی ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺻﺪﺍ‬ /USB ‫/ﭘﻮﺭﺕ‬MHL ‫ﭘﻮﺭﺕ‬ ‫ﺷﺎﺭژﺭ‬ ‫ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﺻﺪﺍی ﺯﻧﮓ‬ :‫ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ‬ • .‫ﺭﺍ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‬ ‫ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﺻﺪﺍی ﮔﻮﺷﯽ‬ :‫ﺩﺭ ﻃﻮﻝ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ‬ • .‫ﺭﺍ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‬ ‫ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﺻﺪﺍ‬ :‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻳﮏ ﺁﻫﻨﮓ‬ • /‫ﮐﻠﻴﺪ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ/ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ‬ ‫ﺟﮏ ﮔﻮﺷﯽ‬ .‫ﺭﺍ...
Page 176 ‫ﺁﺷﻨﺎﻳﯽ ﺑﺎ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ‬ ‫ﻟﻨﺰ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ‬ ‫ﻫﺸﺪﺍﺭ‬ ‫ﻓﻼﺵ‬ ‫ﻣﺤﻔﻈﻪ ﺑﺎﻃﺮی ﺭﺍ ﻣﯽ ﺑﻨﺪﺩ. ﻟﻄﻔﺎ ﻗﺎﺏ ﭘﺸﺘﯽ ﺭﺍ‬ .‫ﺑﺎﺯ ﻧﮑﻨﻴﺪ‬ ‫ﺑﻠﻨﺪﮔﻮ‬...
Page 177 ‫ﻳﺎﺩﺩﺍﺷﺖ‬ ‫ﺍﺯ ﻳﺎﺩﺩﺍﺷﺖ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﻳﺎﺩﺩﺍﺷﺖ ﻫﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺣﻴﻦ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺑﺎ ﻳﮏ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬ ..‫ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻳﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻓﻌﻠﯽ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‬ ‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻣﻨﻮی ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ‬ ‫ﮐﻠﻴﺪ ﻳﺎﺩﺩﺍﺷﺖ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻭ‬ ‫ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ‬ ‫ﺑﻴﻦ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻗﻠﻢ، ﺭﻧﮓ، ﭘﺎک ﮐﻦ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﺭﺩ...
Page 178 ‫ﺁﺷﻨﺎﻳﯽ ﺑﺎ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ‬ ‫– ﻳﺎﺩﺩﺍﺷﺖ ﻓﻌﻠﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﻳﺎ ﺑﺎ ﺩﻳﮕﺮﺍﻥ ﺑﻪ‬ ‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ ﻳﺎﺩﺩﺍﺷﺖ، ﺍﺯ ﻧﻮک‬ :‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ‬ .‫ﺍﺷﺘﺮﺍک ﺑﮕﺬﺍﺭﻳﺪ‬ .‫ﺍﻧﮕﺸﺖ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ. ﺍﺯ ﻧﺎﺧﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻧﮑﻨﻴﺪ‬ .‫– ﻳﺎﺩﺩﺍﺷﺖ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻓﻌﻠﯽ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ﻳﺎﺩﺩﺍﺷﺖ‬ ‫ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ...
Page 179 ‫ﻧﺼﺐ ﻣﻴﮑﺮﻭ ﺳﻴﻢ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ‬ : ‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﮐﻪ ﺑﺘﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﺎ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﺧﻮﺩ ﮐﺎﺭ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ. ﺑﺮﺍی ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻣﻴﮑﺮﻭ ﺳﻴﻢ‬ .‫ﺩﺭﭘﻮﺵ ﺷﮑﺎﻑ ﻣﻴﮑﺮﻭ ﺳﻴﻢ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﭘﻴﻦ ﺑﺎﺯ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‬ ‫ﻣﻴﮑﺮﻭ ﺳﻴﻢ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺟﺎﻳﮕﺎﻩ ﻣﻴﮑﺮﻭ ﺳﻴﻢ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﻭ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﺑﻠﻐﺰﺍﻧﻴﺪ.
Page 180 ‫ﺁﺷﻨﺎﻳﯽ ﺑﺎ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺷﺎﺭژ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‬ .‫ﻣﺤﻞ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺷﺎﺭژﺭ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺎﻻی ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ. ﺷﺎﺭژﺭ ﺭﺍ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﭘﺮﻳﺰ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻓﺰﺍﻳﺶ ﻃﻮﻝ ﻋﻤﺮ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی، ﻻﺯﻡ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ‬ :‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ‬ .‫ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ، ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﮐﺎﻣﻼ ً ﺷﺎﺭژ ﺷﻮﺩ‬...
Page 181 ‫ﺗﺎ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﺑﺎﺯ ﺷﻮﺩ. ﺁﺧﺮﻳﻦ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺍی ﮐﻪ‬ .‫ﻧﻴﺮﻭی ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺭﺍ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‬ .‫ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻣﯽ ﮐﺮﺩﻳﺪ ﺑﺎﺯ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‬ ‫ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻧﻤﯽ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ، ﮐﻠﻴﺪ‬LG-P895 ‫ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﺍﺯ ﮔﻮﺷﯽ‬ ‫ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻗﻔﻞ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ‬ ‫ﺭﻭﺷﻦ/ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ/ﻗﻔﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻳﻤﻦ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻗﻔﻞ‬...
Page 182 ‫ﺁﺷﻨﺎﻳﯽ ﺑﺎ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ‬ :‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﺍﻟﮕﻮی ﺑﺎﺯ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻳﺎﺩ ﻧﻤﯽ ﺁﻭﺭﻳﺪ‬ ،‫< ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ < ﻫﻴﭻ، ﺣﺮﮐﺖ‬ ‫ﻗﻔﻞ ﮔﺸﺎﻳﯽ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ، ﺍﻟﮕﻮ، ﮐﺪ ﭘﻴﻦ ﻳﺎ ﺭﻣﺰ ﻭﺭﻭﺩ‬ ‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﺳﻌﯽ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﺍﻳﺪ ﮐﻪ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﺍﺷﺘﺮﺍک ﮔﻮﮔﻞ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺷﻮﻳﺪ‬ .‫ﺭﺍ...
Page 183 ‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ‬ ‫ﻧﮑﺎﺗﯽ ﺩﺭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺑﯽ‬ :‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻨﺠﺎ ﻧﮑﺎﺗﯽ ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺑﻪ ﻧﺤﻮﻩ ﭘﻴﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻨﻮﻫﺎی‬ ‫• ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻳﮏ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ، ﻭﺳﻂ ﻧﻤﺎﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ‬ .‫ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺁﻭﺭﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‬ .‫ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‬ ‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ - ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻳﮏ ﻣﻨﻮ/ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻳﺎ ﺑﺎﺯ‬ ‫•...
Page 184 ‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ‬ ‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ‬ ‫ﻧﻤﺎﺩ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ‬ .‫ﮔﻴﺮی ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺑﯽ ﺑﺎﺯ ﺷﻮﺩ، ﻭ ﺗﻤﺎﺳﯽ ﺑﺮﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‬ ‫ﮐﺎﻓﯽ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺍﻧﮕﺸﺖ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﭼﭗ ﻳﺎ ﺭﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﮑﺸﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺑﺎﺯ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻣﺨﺎﻃﺒﻴﻦ، ﻧﻤﺎﺩ ﻣﺨﺎﻃﺒﻴﻦ ﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﺻﻔﺤﺎﺕ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ. ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻫﺮ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ‬ .‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ...
Page 185 ‫ﺳﻔﺎﺭﺷﯽ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﻣﻨﻮی ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺍﻓﺰﻭﺩﻥ، ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﺩﻟﺨﻮﺍﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی‬ ‫ﺍﻓﺰﻭﺩﻥ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ. ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ‬ ‫ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﺍﻓﺰﻭﺩﻥ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ‬ .‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﮐﺮﺩ‬ ‫ﻫﺎ، ﺑﺎﺭﮔﻴﺮی ﻫﺎ، ﻭﻳﺠﺖ ﻫﺎ ﻳﺎ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﺯﻣﻴﻨﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺁﻥ‬ ‫ﺁﻥ...
Page 186 ‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺯﮔﺸﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺧﻴﺮ‬ ‫ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ. ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‬ ‫ﮐﻠﻴﺪ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺍﺧﻴﺮ‬ ‫ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻳﮏ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ ﺑﺎ ﻧﻤﺎﺩﻫﺎی ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎﻳﯽ‬ .‫ﮐﻪ ﺍﺧﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﺍﻳﺪ ﺭﺍ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ‬ ‫ﻧﻤﺎﺩی ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺁﻥ ﺑﺎﺯ ﺷﻮﺩ. ﻳﺎ‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺍی...
Page 187 ،‫ﺳﺎﺯی، ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻫﻮﺍﭘﻴﻤﺎ، ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﭼﺮﺧﺸﯽ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺷﺮﺡ‬ ‫ﻧﻤﺎﺩ‬ ‫ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﻳﯽ، ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻳﺎ ﻫﺎﺕ ﺍﺳﭙﺎﺕ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺣﻤﻞ‬ .‫ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺭﺳﯽ ﻭ ﻣﺪﻳﺮﻳﺖ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‬Wi-fi ‫ﻣﻴﮑﺮﻭ ﺳﻴﻢ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ‬ ‫ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻧﻮﺍﺭ ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺖ‬ ‫ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺳﻴﮕﻨﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﻧﻮﺍﺭ ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺖ ﺍﺯ ﻧﻤﺎﺩﻫﺎی ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮی ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﯽ ﻧﻈﻴﺮ‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻫﻮﺍﭘﻴﻤﺎ‬ ‫ﻗﺪﺭﺕ...
Page 188 ‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ‬ ‫ﺷﺮﺡ‬ ‫ﻧﻤﺎﺩ‬ ‫ﺷﺮﺡ‬ ‫ﻧﻤﺎﺩ‬ ‫ﺯﻧﮓ ﻫﺸﺪﺍﺭ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺷﺪ‬ ‫ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﻧﮕﻬﺪﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺷﺪ‬ ‫ﭘﺴﺖ ﺻﻮﺗﯽ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺻﺪﺍی ﺑﻠﻨﺪ‬ ‫ﺯﻧﮓ ﺑﯽ ﺻﺪﺍ ﺍﺳﺖ‬ ‫ﻣﻴﮑﺮﻭﻓﻦ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺑﯽ ﺻﺪﺍ ﺍﺳﺖ‬ ‫ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ‬NFC ‫ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺑﯽ ﭘﺎﺳﺦ‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻟﺮﺯﺷﯽ‬ ‫ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺗﺮی...
Page 189 ‫ﺷﺮﺡ‬ ‫ﻧﻤﺎﺩ‬ ‫ﺷﺮﺡ‬ ‫ﻧﻤﺎﺩ‬ ‫ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻫﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻝ ﻫﻤﮕﺎﻡ ﺳﺎﺯی ﺍﺳﺖ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻝ ﺷﺎﺭژ ﺍﺳﺖ‬ ‫ ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ‬USB ‫ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺑﺎ ﮐﺎﺑﻞ‬ ‫ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ‬Gmail ‫ﺍﺳﺖ‬ Talk ‫ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﮔﻮﮔﻞ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺭﮔﻴﺮی ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻫﺎ‬ ‫ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺭﮔﺬﺍﺭی ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻫﺎ‬ ‫ﺁﻫﻨﮕﯽ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻝ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺍﺳﺖ‬ ‫...
Page 190 ‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ‬ ‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﮐﻠﻴﺪ ﺭﻭی ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‬ ‫ﺷﺮﺡ‬ ‫ﻧﻤﺎﺩ‬ ‫ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﮐﻠﻴﺪ ﺭﻭی ﺻﻔﺤﻪ، ﻣﺘﻦ‬ Wi-Fi ‫ﻫﺎﺕ ﺍﺳﭙﺎﺕ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺣﻤﻞ‬ ،‫ﺭﺍ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ. ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﻣﯽ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﻣﺘﻨﯽ ﺭﺍ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‬ ‫ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﺍﺳﺖ‬ ‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﮐﻠﻴﺪ ﺭﻭی ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‬ ‫...
Page 191 ‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﻧﮕﻬﺪﺍﺭﻳﺪ ﺗﺎ ﮐﻠﻴﺪ ﺑﺰﺭﮔﻨﻤﺎﻳﯽ ﺑﺰﺭﮔﺘﺮ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻮی ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ، ﺍﻳﻦ ﺯﺑﺎﻧﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ‬ .‫ﺷﺪﻩ ﻭ ﻧﻮﻳﺴﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺯﺑﺎﻥ ﻫﺎی ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺭﺍ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺩﻫﺪ‬ .‫ﻧﮕﻬﺪﺍﺭﻳﺪ‬ .‫ﻧﻮﻳﺴﻪ ﻭﻳﮋﻩ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‬ ‫ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﻳﮏ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ‬ .‫ﺷﻮﺩ‬...
Page 192 ‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺍﺷﺘﺮﺍک ﮔﻮﮔﻞ‬ .‫ﺳﭙﺲ ﻭﺭﻭﺩ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‬ ،‫ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻭﻟﻴﻦ ﺑﺎﺭ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‬ ‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﻓﺮﺻﺖ ﺩﺭ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ ﮐﻪ‬ ‫ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺍﺷﺘﺮﺍک ﮔﻮﮔﻞ ﺩﺭ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ، ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﺷﺒﮑﻪ...
Page 193 ‫ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻪ ﺷﺒﮑﻪ ﻫﺎ ﻭ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻫﺎ‬ Wi-Fi .‫ﺑﺘﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺑﻪ ﺁﻥ ﻫﺎ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﺷﻮﺩ‬ ‫ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻧﻤﯽ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ، ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ‬Wi-Fi ‫ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﺍﺯ‬ ‫ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻨﺘﺮﻧﺖ ﭘﺮ ﺳﺮﻋﺖ‬Wi-Fi ‫ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ‬ .‫ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﻋﻤﺮ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺍﻓﺰﺍﻳﺶ ﻳﺎﺑﺪ‬ ‫ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ‬WAP ‫ﻭ ﺑﺎ ﭘﻮﺷﺶ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﺩﺳﺘﻴﺎﺑﯽ ﺑﯽ ﺳﻴﻢ‬ ‫...
Page 194 ‫ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻪ ﺷﺒﮑﻪ ﻫﺎ ﻭ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻫﺎ‬ ‫ﮐﻨﻴﺪ. )ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﺑﺎ ﻣﺪﻳﺮ ﺷﺒﮑﻪ ﺧﻮﺩ‬ Wi-Fi ‫ ﻭ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻪ ﺷﺒﮑﻪ‬Wi-Fi ‫ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ‬ (.‫ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ‬ ‫ﺭﺍ‬ Wi-Fi < ‫< ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎ < ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺯﺑﺎﻧﻪ‬ ‫، ﺩﺭ ﻧﻮﺍﺭ‬ Wi-Fi ‫ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻪ ﻳﮏ ﺷﺒﮑﻪ‬ ‫ﺍﺯ...
Page 195 ‫ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ﻭ ﻣﺮﺗﺒﻂ ﺳﺎﺯی ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺑﺎ ﺑﺎ‬ ‫، ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺍﺯ‬LG-P895 ‫ﺑﺎ ﮔﻮﺷﯽ‬ !‫ﻧﮑﺘﻪ‬ ‫ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ﻳﮏ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ‬ ‫ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﺯﻳﺎﺩ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ﻟﺬﺕ ﺑﺒﺮﻳﺪ. ﺍﮔﺮ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ‬ ‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﺷﺪﻥ ﺑﻪ ﻳﮏ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺍﺑﺘﺪﺍ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ‬ ‫ﻧﻈﺮ ﺟﻬﺖ ﺍﺷﺘﺮﺍک ﮔﺬﺍﺭی ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎ، ﺍﺯ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ‬...
Page 196 ‫ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻪ ﺷﺒﮑﻪ ﻫﺎ ﻭ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻫﺎ‬ ‫ﺍﺷﺘﺮﺍک ﮔﺬﺍﺭی ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻫﺎی ﺗﻠﻔﻦ‬ .‫ﺭﻭی ﺟﺴﺘﺠﻮی ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻫﺎ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ‬ ‫ﺍﺯ ﻟﻴﺴﺖ، ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻣﺮﺗﺒﻂ‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻧﺒﻮﺩﻥ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻻﺕ ﺑﯽ ﺳﻴﻢ، ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ‬ .‫ﺳﺎﺯی ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‬ Wi-Fi ‫ ﻭ ﻫﺎﺕ ﺍﺳﭙﺎﺕ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺣﻤﻞ‬USB ‫ﺑﻪ ﺍﻳﻨﺘﺮﻧﺖ ﺑﺎ‬ ‫ﻭﻗﺘﯽ...
Page 197 ‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺗﺮﻳﻦ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺩﺭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻳﻨﺘﺮﻧﺖ‬ ‫ ﻳﺎ‬Windows 7 ‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻋﺎﻣﻞ ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ‬ !‫ﻧﮑﺘﻪ‬ ‫ﻭ ﻫﺎﺕ ﺍﺳﭙﺎﺕ ﻫﺎی ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺣﻤﻞ، ﺍﺯ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ‬ ‫( ﺍﺳﺖ، ﻣﻌﻤﻮﻻ‬Ubuntu ‫ )ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ‬Linux ‫ﻧﺴﺨﻪ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ‬ ‫ﻫﺎی ﻋﺎﻣﻞ ﭘﺸﺘﻴﺒﺎﻧﯽ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻭ ﺳﺎﻳﺮ ﺟﺰﺋﻴﺎﺕ، ﺑﻪ ﺳﺎﻳﺖ‬ ‫ﻧﻴﺎﺯی...
Page 198 ‫ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻪ ﺷﺒﮑﻪ ﻫﺎ ﻭ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻫﺎ‬ ‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻧﺎﻡ ﻳﺎ ﺍﻳﻤﻦ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻫﺎﺕ ﺍﺳﭙﺎﺕ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ‬ .‫ﺑﺎﺯ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‬ ‫)ﻧﺎﻡ( ﺷﺒﮑﻪ ﺭﺍ ﮐﻪ ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ ﻫﺎ‬ SSID ‫ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ‬ • ‫ﺣﻤﻞ‬ ‫ﻳﺎ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻫﺎی ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺟﺴﺘﺠﻮی ﺷﺒﮑﻪ ﻫﺎی‬ ‫( ﺭﺍ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ‬SSID) ‫ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ‬Wi-Fi ‫ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻧﺎﻡ ﺷﺒﮑﻪ‬ .‫...
Page 199 Wi-Fi Cast ‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ‬ ‫ﻭﺭﻭﺩ ﺭﺍ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ. ﻳﺎ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻨﻮی ﺍﻣﻨﻴﺖ، ﺑﺎﺯ‬ Wi-Fi ‫ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺍﻣﻨﻴﺖ ﺍﺯ ﺷﺒﮑﻪ‬ ‫ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﯽ، ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻭ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﺭﺍ‬ .‫ﺑﺮﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺷﻮﺩ‬ ‫ﺑﻴﻦ ﮐﺎﺭﺑﺮﺍﻧﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺁﻧﺪﺭﻭﻳﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﻨﺪ ﻭ‬ .‫ﺭﺍ...
Page 200 ‫ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻪ ﺷﺒﮑﻪ ﻫﺎ ﻭ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻫﺎ‬ .‫ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻧﻤﻮﺩ‬Wi-Fi ‫ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩﻫﺎی ﺩﻳﮕﺮ‬ ‫ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻫﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻪ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻫﺎی‬ .‫ﺟﺴﺘﺠﻮ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‬ ‫ﺭﺍ‬ ‫< ﺯﺑﺎﻧﻪ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎ < ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ < ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ‬ ‫ ﺭﺍ‬Wi-Fi Direct < ‫ﺍﺯ ﺑﯽ ﺳﻴﻢ ﻭ ﺷﺒﮑﻪ ﻫﺎ‬ .‫ﺭﺍ...
Page 201 ،‫ﻫﺮ ﺩﻭ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﺮﺍی ﭘﺸﺘﻴﺒﺎﻧﯽ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻭﻳﮋﮔﯽ‬ ،‫ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺻﺎﺣﺐ ﮔﺮﻭﻩ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‬ :‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ‬ .‫ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‬DLNA ‫ﺩﺍﺭﺍی ﻣﺠﻮﺯ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮی ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺳﺮﻭﻳﺲ ﮔﻴﺮﻧﺪﻩ‬ ‫ ﻭ ﺍﺟﺎﺯﻩ‬SmartShare ‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ‬ ‫ ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ‬Wi-Fi Direct ‫ﻣﺼﺮﻑ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ. ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﺍﺷﺘﺮﺍک...
Page 202 ‫ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻪ ﺷﺒﮑﻪ ﻫﺎ ﻭ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻫﺎ‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻫﺎی ﭘﺨﺶ‬ ‫• ﺍﮔﺮ ﻣﯽ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﺑﻪ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻫﺎی ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﺍﺟﺎﺯﻩ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‬ ‫ﮐﻪ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎی ﺭﺳﺎﻧﻪ ﺍی ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺑﺎﺭﮔﺬﺍﺭی‬ (‫ﺍﺟﺎﺯﻩ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺍﺭﺍﺋﻪ ﺩﻫﻨﺪﻩ )ﻣﺜﻼ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ‬ .‫ﮐﻨﻨﺪ، ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺖ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‬ ‫ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ...
Page 203 ‫ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ‬ ‫ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﮔﺎﻟﺮی، ﺯﺑﺎﻧﻪ‬ ‫ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ‬ ‫ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﺍﺯ‬ .‫ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﻪ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺩﻭﺭ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‬ .‫ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‬ ‫: ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﻪ ﺷﺒﮑﻪ ﻭﺻﻞ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬ .‫ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﻪ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺮﻭﺭ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‬ ‫ﻳﮏ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﮐﻮﭼﮏ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﻧﮕﻬﺪﺍﺭﻳﺪ‬ ‫: ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ...
Page 204 ‫ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻪ ﺷﺒﮑﻪ ﻫﺎ ﻭ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻫﺎ‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺑﺎﺭﮔﻴﺮی ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﻪ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺩﻭﺭ‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ، ﺑﺮﺭﺳﯽ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‬ :‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ‬ SmartShare < ‫< ﺯﺑﺎﻧﻪ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎ‬ ‫ ﺑﻪ ﺷﺒﮑﻪ ﺧﺎﻧﮕﯽ ﺷﻤﺎ‬Wi-Fi ‫ﮐﻪ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ‬ .‫ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‬ .‫ﻣﺘﺼﻞ...
Page 205 ‫ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﻪ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺩﻭﺭ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺑﺎﺭﮔﺬﺍﺭی‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺑﺎﺭﮔﺬﺍﺭی ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﻪ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺩﻭﺭ‬ .‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‬ ‫ﻣﻄﻤﺌﻦ ﺷﻮﻳﺪ ﮐﻪ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺩﺍﺧﻠﯽ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ‬ :‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ‬ ‫ﺻﺤﻴﺢ ﻧﺼﺐ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻭ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺖ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻨﻮی‬ ‫ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ‬DLNA ‫ﺑﺮﺧﯽ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻫﺎی ﺩﺍﺭﺍی‬ :‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ‬...
Page 206 ‫ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﻫﺎ‬ ‫ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺑﺎ ﻣﺨﺎﻃﺒﻴﻦ‬ ‫ﺑﺮﻗﺮﺍﺭی ﺗﻤﺎﺱ‬ .‫ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‬ ،‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺑﺎﺯ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻣﺨﺎﻃﺒﻴﻦ‬ .‫ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‬ ،‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺑﺎﺯ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﮐﻠﻴﺪ‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ﻣﺨﺎﻃﺒﻴﻦ ﺣﺮﮐﺖ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﻳﺎ ﭼﻨﺪ ﺣﺮﻑ ﺍﻭﻝ‬ ‫ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﮐﻠﻴﺪ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ. ﺑﺮﺍی ﭘﺎک‬ ‫ﻧﺎﻡ...
Page 207 ‫ﺑﺮﻗﺮﺍﺭی ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺩﻭﻡ‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﭘﻴﺎﻡ، ﻧﻤﺎﺩ ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﻓﻮﺭی ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ‬ .‫ﻧﮕﻬﺪﺍﺭﻳﺪ ﻭ ﺑﮑﺸﻴﺪ‬ ‫ﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﻃﻮﻝ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺍﻭﻝ، ﻣﻨﻮ < ﺍﻓﺰﻭﺩﻥ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ‬ ‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﮔﻴﺮی ﮐﻨﻴﺪ. ﻫﻤﭽﻨﻴﻦ ﻣﯽ‬ ‫ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﻓﻮﺭی‬ !‫ﻧﮑﺘﻪ‬ ‫ﺑﻪ ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﻫﺎی ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ...
Page 208 ‫ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﻫﺎ‬ ‫ﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﭘﺎﻳﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﻫﺎی ﻓﻌﺎﻝ، ﭘﺎﻳﺎﻥ‬ ،‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ، ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭ ﻣﺪﺕ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ‬ !‫ﻧﮑﺘﻪ‬ ‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﻳﺎ ﮐﻠﻴﺪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‬ ‫ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻫﺮﻳﮏ ﺍﺯ ﻭﺭﻭﺩی ﻫﺎی ﮔﺰﺍﺭﺵ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ‬ ‫ﻭ ﻧﻮﺍﺭ ﺍﻋﻼﻥ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﺑﮑﺸﻴﺪ، ﺳﭙﺲ ﻧﻤﺎﺩ‬ .‫ﺭﺍ...
Page 209 ‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﭘﺴﺖ ﺻﻮﺗﯽ - ﺍﮔﺮ ﺍﺯ ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﭘﺴﺖ ﺻﻮﺗﯽ‬ .‫ﻣﻨﻮ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ، ﺍﻳﻦ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺍﻣﮑﺎﻥ ﻣﯽ‬ ‫ﺭﺍ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ ﻭ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ‬ ‫ﺩﻫﺪ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺟﻬﺖ ﮔﻮﺵ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﻭ‬ .‫ﻣﻮﺭﺩ...
Page 210 ‫ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﻫﺎ‬ (‫ﻧﻤﯽ ﮐﻨﻨﺪ‬ ‫ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ – ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﮐﻪ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺧﻂ‬ ‫ﻣﺸﻐﻮﻝ ﺍﺳﺖ، ﺑﻪ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﭘﺎﺳﺦ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻧﻤﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻳﺎ ﻭﻗﺘﯽ‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﯽ – ﺍﻳﻦ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺍﻣﮑﺎﻥ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ‬ .‫ﺳﻴﮕﻨﺎﻟﯽ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ، ﻫﻤﻪ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﻫﺎ ﻣﻨﺘﻘﻞ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‬ :‫ﮐﻪ...
Page 211 ‫ﺍﺳﺎﻣﯽ‬ ‫ﺍﻓﺰﻭﺩﻥ ﻣﺨﺎﻃﺐ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ‬ ‫ﻣﺨﺎﻃﺒﻴﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﻭ ﺁﻥ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ‬ ‫ﻣﺨﺎﻃﺒﻴﻦ ﺩﺭ ﺍﺷﺘﺮﺍک ﮔﻮﮔﻞ ﺧﻮﺩ ﻳﺎ ﺍﺷﺘﺮﺍک ﻫﺎی‬ ‫ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ، ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﻣﺨﺎﻃﺐ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﺩﻳﮕﺮی ﮐﻪ ﺍﺯ ﻫﻤﮕﺎﻡ ﺳﺎﺯی ﻣﺨﺎﻃﺒﻴﻦ ﭘﺸﺘﻴﺒﺎﻧﯽ ﻣﯽ‬ .‫ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﮐﻠﻴﺪ ﻣﻨﻮ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‬ .‫ﮐﻨﻨﺪ،...
Page 212 .‫ﻗﺒﻠﯽ ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ ﺻﺎﺩﺭ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‬ .‫ﺳﺘﺎﺭﻩ ﺯﺭﺩ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‬ .‫ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ ﻧﺼﺐ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‬ LG PC Suite ‫ﺍﺑﺘﺪﺍ‬ ‫ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺟﺮﺍ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺑﺎ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻋﺎﻣﻞ‬ ‫ﺣﺬﻑ ﻣﺨﺎﻃﺐ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺨﺎﻃﺒﻴﻦ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻋﻼﻗﻪ‬ ‫ ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ‬USB ‫ﺁﻧﺪﺭﻭﻳﺪ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﮐﺎﺑﻞ‬...
Page 213 ‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻫﺎی ﻣﺨﺎﻃﺒﻴﻦ ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ ﻭ ﻣﺨﺎﻃﺒﻴﻦ‬ .‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‬ ‫ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺍﺧﺘﻼﻑ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ، ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺑﺎﺕ ﻳﺎ‬ ‫ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ‬LG PC Suite ‫ﺍﺻﻼﺣﺎﺕ ﻻﺯﻡ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ‬ ‫ﻳﮏ ﭘﻨﺠﺮﻩ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻭ ﻳﮏ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ‬ .‫ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‬ .‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‬...
Page 214 ‫ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﺭﺳﺎﻧﯽ‬ ‫ ﻭ‬SMS ‫ ﺗﺮﮐﻴﺒﯽ ﺍﺯ‬LG-P895 ‫ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ﻣﺪﻝ‬ ‫ﺑﻪ ﺍﺯﺍی ﻫﺮ ﻧﻔﺮ ﮐﻪ ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﻣﺘﻨﯽ ﺑﻪ ﻭی ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ‬ :‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ‬ ‫ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻳﮏ ﻣﻨﻮی ﺳﺎﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺁﺳﺎﻥ‬MMS .‫ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺍﺯ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻫﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺖ ﻣﯽ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ‬ .‫ﮔﻨﺠﺎﻧﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‬...
Page 215 .‫ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﭘﻴﺎﻡ، ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﻫﺸﺪﺍﺭ: ﺍﮔﺮ ﻳﮏ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮی، ﻭﻳﺪﺋﻮﻳﯽ ﻳﺎ‬ ‫ﭘﺎﺳﺦ ﻫﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ. ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﯽ ﮐﻪ‬ ‫ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ‬SMS ،‫ ﺍﻓﺰﻭﺩﻩ ﺷﻮﺩ‬SMS ‫ﺻﻮﺗﯽ ﺑﻪ‬ ،‫ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﻫﺎی ﺍﺿﺎﻓﯽ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻭ ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‬ ‫...
Page 216 ‫ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﺭﺳﺎﻧﯽ‬ ‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﭘﻴﺎﻡ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻧﻤﺎﺩﻫﺎی ﺍﺣﺴﺎﺳﯽ‬ ‫ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺍﺯ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ‬LG-P895 ‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﮔﻮﺷﯽ‬ ‫ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻧﻤﺎﺩﻫﺎی ﺍﺣﺴﺎﺳﯽ، ﺑﻪ ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﻫﺎی ﺧﻮﺩ‬ ‫ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﻨﺎﺑﺮﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﻼﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ‬ .‫ﺷﻮﺭ ﻭ ﺍﺣﺴﺎﺱ ﺑﺒﺨﺸﻴﺪ‬ ‫ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ. ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺩﻟﺨﻮﺍﻩ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ‬...
Page 217 ‫ﺍﻳﻤﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻓﺰﻭﺩﻥ ﻳﮏ ﺍﺷﺘﺮﺍک ﺍﻳﻤﻴﻞ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ‬ ‫ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺍﻳﻤﻴﻞ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺧﻮﺍﻧﺪﻥ ﺍﻳﻤﻴﻞ‬ ‫ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ. ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ‬Gmail ‫ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺗﯽ ﻫﻤﭽﻮﻥ‬ ‫< ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‬ ‫< ﺯﺑﺎﻧﻪ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎ < ﺍﻳﻤﻴﻞ‬ • :‫ﺍﻳﻤﻴﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺍﺷﺘﺮﺍک ﻫﺎی ﺯﻳﺮ ﭘﺸﺘﻴﺒﺎﻧﯽ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‬ ‫<...
Page 218 ‫ﺍﻳﻤﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺷﻮﺩ. ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﻫﺎی ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﻭﺭﻭﺩی ﺗﺮﮐﻴﺒﯽ ﺩﺭ ﭼﭗ ﺑﻪ‬ :‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺣﺬﻑ ﻳﮏ ﺍﺷﺘﺮﺍک ﺍﻳﻤﻴﻞ‬ ،‫ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺭﻧﮕﯽ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻫﺮ ﺍﺷﺘﺮﺍک ﮐﺪﮔﺬﺍﺭی ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﻧﺪ‬ ‫< ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‬ ‫< ﺯﺑﺎﻧﻪ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎ < ﺍﻳﻤﻴﻞ‬ • ‫ﺭﻧﮓ ﻫﺎی ﻳﮑﺴﺎﻥ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﻳﮏ ﺍﺷﺘﺮﺍک ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‬ ‫<...
Page 219 ‫ﺍﺷﺘﺮﺍک، ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﭘﻮﺷﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺩﻳﮕﺮی ﻧﻴﺰ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ‬ !‫ﻧﮑﺘﻪ‬ .‫ﺑﺎﺷﻴﺪ‬ ‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﺩﺭ ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ﺍﺷﺘﺮﺍک ﻫﺎی ﺍﻳﻤﻴﻞ، ﺭﻭی ﻳﮏ‬ ‫ﺍﺷﺘﺮﺍک ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﻃﻮﻻﻧﯽ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ، ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ‬ ‫ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﻭ ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻳﻤﻴﻞ‬ .‫ﻧﻈﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﭘﻨﺠﺮﻩ ﺍی ﮐﻪ ﺑﺎﺯ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺍی...
Page 220 ‫ﺍﻳﻤﻴﻞ‬ .‫ﻣﺘﻦ ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﺭﺍ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‬ .‫ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‬ ‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﺑﻪ ﺷﺒﮑﻪ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﻧﻴﺴﺘﻴﺪ، ﻣﺜﻼ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ‬ ‫ﻫﻮﺍﭘﻴﻤﺎ ﻫﺴﺘﻴﺪ، ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﻫﺎی ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻟﯽ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺩﺭ ﭘﻮﺷﻪ‬ ‫ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺗﺎ ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺩﻭﺑﺎﺭﻩ‬ ‫ﺑﻪ ﺷﺒﮑﻪ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﺷﻮﻳﺪ. ﺍﮔﺮ ﺩﺭ ﭘﻮﺷﻪ ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ‬ ‫ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ...
Page 221 ‫ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ‬ ‫ﺁﺷﻨﺎﻳﯽ ﺑﺎ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺎﺏ‬ ‫ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ – ﺑﻴﻦ ﻟﻨﺰ ﻋﻘﺐ ﻭ ﺟﻠﻮی ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺖ‬ .‫ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‬ ‫ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﻋﮑﺲ ﺑﺎ ﮔﻔﺘﻦ ﭼﻴﺰ – ﺑﮕﻮﻳﻴﺪ ﭼﻴﺰ ﺗﺎ ﺁﻣﺎﺩﮔﯽ ﺑﺮﺍی ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ‬ .‫ﻋﮑﺲ ﺍﻋﻼﻡ ﺷﻮﺩ‬ ‫ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﻋﮑﺲ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ – ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﺷﺎﺗﺮ، ﺑﺮﺍی ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ‬ .‫ﻋﮑﺲ...
Page 222 ‫ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ‬ ‫ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﻋﮑﺲ ﺭﺍ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻴﺪ‬ ‫ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻓﻮﺭی‬ ‫ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺁﺧﺮﻳﻦ ﻋﮑﺲ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ‬ .‫ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﺯ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‬ ‫ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ‬ .‫ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﻮﺩ‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﻋﮑﺲ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ، ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﯽ ﮐﻪ ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ﺭﺍ ﻧﮕﻪ‬ ،‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ، ﺍﻳﻤﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ...
Page 223 .‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﻮﺩ‬ .‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺣﺬﻑ ﻋﮑﺲ، ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‬ .‫ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ – ﻋﮑﺲ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻭ ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‬ .‫ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‬ ،‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺑﺎﺯ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎ‬ ‫ﺩﻗﺖ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻋﮑﺲ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ. ﺍﮔﺮ‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ – ﺍﻳﻦ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ‬ ‫ﺩﻗﺖ...
Page 224 ‫ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ‬ .‫ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﺩﻳﮕﺮی ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ‬ ‫– ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﺷﺎﺗﺮ، ﺑﺮﺍی ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ‬ .‫ﺟﺰﺋﻴﺎﺕ – ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﻋﮑﺲ ﺭﺍ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ‬ ‫ﻋﮑﺲ ﺍﺯ ﻳﮏ ﻟﺤﻈﻪ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺳﺖ ﺭﻓﺘﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﻤﺎﺩ ﺭﺍ‬ .‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﭘﻴﺸﺮﻓﺘﻪ‬ ‫،...
Page 225 ‫– ﺩﻗﺖ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻋﮑﺲ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ. ﺍﮔﺮ‬ ‫- ﮐﻴﻔﻴﺖ ﻫﺎی ﺭﻧﮓ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺷﺮﺍﻳﻂ ﻧﻮﺭی‬ ‫ﺩﻗﺖ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﻻ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ، ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻧﻴﺰ‬ .‫ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺑﻬﺒﻮﺩ ﻣﯽ ﺑﺨﺸﺪ‬ ‫ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ، ﻳﻌﻨﯽ ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎی ﮐﻤﺘﺮی ﺭﺍ‬ ‫- ﺟﻠﻮﻩ ﻫﺎی ﻫﻨﺮی ﺭﻭی ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎ ﺍﻋﻤﺎﻝ‬ .‫ﻣﯽ...
Page 226 ‫ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ‬ ‫ﺟﻐﺮﺍﻓﻴﺎﻳﯽ ﻋﮑﺲ ﭘﺸﺘﻴﺒﺎﻧﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ، ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎ‬ ‫ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﺍﺯ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﻳﺪ، ﺑﺮﺧﯽ ﺍﺯ‬ !‫ﻧﮑﺘﻪ‬ .‫ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻘﺸﻪ ﺑﺒﻴﻨﻴﺪ‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﺗﻌﺎﺩﻝ ﺳﻔﻴﺪی، ﻃﺮﺡ ﺭﻧﮓ، ﺗﺎﻳﻤﺮ‬ ‫ﻭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺻﺤﻨﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﭘﻴﺶ ﻓﺮﺽ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺑﺮﻣﯽ‬ ،‫ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﺍﺳﺖ‬GPS ‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﮐﻪ‬ :‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ‬...
Page 227 ‫ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻓﻴﻠﻤﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی‬ ‫ﺁﺷﻨﺎﻳﯽ ﺑﺎ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺎﺏ‬ ‫ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ – ﺑﻴﻦ ﻟﻨﺰ ﻋﻘﺐ ﻭ ﺟﻠﻮی ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺖ‬ .‫ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‬ .‫ﺑﺰﺭﮔﻨﻤﺎﻳﯽ - ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺰﺭگ ﻳﺎ ﮐﻮﭼﮏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‬ ‫ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﻳﯽ – ﺍﻳﻦ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﻧﻮﺭی ﮐﻪ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ‬ .‫ﻭ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‬ ‫ﺟﻠﻮﻩ...
Page 228 ‫ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻓﻴﻠﻤﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی‬ ‫ﻓﻴﻠﻤﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﻓﻮﺭی‬ !‫ﻧﮑﺘﻪ‬ ‫ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﺯ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﺭﺍ‬ ‫– ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﺣﻴﻦ ﻓﻴﻠﻤﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﻋﮑﺲ‬ .‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‬ .‫ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ‬ ‫ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺎﺏ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻓﻴﻠﻤﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﺭﻭی ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ‬ .‫ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‬ .‫ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‬ ،‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺗﻮﻗﻒ ﻓﻴﻠﻤﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺍی...
Page 229 ‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﭘﻴﺸﺮﻓﺘﻪ‬ ‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺷﻮﺩ. ﺑﺎ‬ ‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺑﻠﻪ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺗﺄﻳﻴﺪ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ. ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺎﺏ ﺩﻭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ‬ ‫ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﻫﻤﻪ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی‬ ،‫ﺍﺯ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺎﺏ‬ .‫ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‬ .‫ﭘﻴﺸﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺯ ﺷﻮﺩ‬ .‫ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‬ ،‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺑﺎﺯ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎ‬ ،‫–...
Page 230 ‫ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻓﻴﻠﻤﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی‬ ‫- ﺑﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺍﻣﮑﺎﻥ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ ﮐﻪ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ‬ ‫- ﻣﺮﻭﺭ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ، ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ‬ .‫ﺩﺭ ﻣﮑﺎﻥ ﻫﺎی ﺗﺎﺭﻳﮏ، ﻓﻼﺵ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‬ .‫ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ‬ ‫– ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺭﺍ )ﺑﻪ‬ ‫–...
Page 231 ‫ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺗﻬﻴﻪ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ‬ .‫ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ/ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻫﺎ ﻭ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﯽ ﺧﻮﺩ، ﻳﮏ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﺷﺨﺼﯽ ﺑﺴﺎﺯﻳﺪ‬ .‫ﺍﺯ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ، ﮐﻠﻴﺪ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎ < ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺗﻬﻴﻪ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‬ .‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‬...
Page 232 ‫ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺗﻬﻴﻪ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ‬ ‫ﺍی ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ، ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ، ﺣﺬﻑ ﺭﺳﺎﻧﻪ‬ ‫– ﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﻤﺎﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻓﺰﻭﺩﻥ‬ ‫ﺍﻓﺰﻭﺩﻥ ﺭﺳﺎﻧﻪ‬ (‫ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﺪﻩ )ﻳﺎ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻫﻤﻪ‬ .‫ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﻭ/ﻳﺎ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻫﺎ ﺑﻪ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‬ .‫ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‬ ‫ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺍی...
Page 233 ‫• ﺑﻪ ﭼﭗ ﻭ ﺭﺍﺳﺖ ﺣﺮﮐﺖ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﻭ ﺻﺤﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ‬ ‫– ﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﻤﺎﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی ﭘﺨﺶ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ‬ ‫ﭘﻴﺶ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ‬ .‫ﺷﺪﻩ ﺭﺍ ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‬ .‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‬ ‫ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ‬ ‫ﻧﻤﺎﺩ ﻫﻤﭙﻮﺷﺎﻧﯽ ﻣﺘﻦ‬ • ‫– ﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﻤﺎﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ‬ ‫ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎ‬...
Page 234 ‫ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ‬ ‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﺍﺯ ﺳﺮﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ‬ .‫ﺷﻮﺩ‬ ‫ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻳﮏ ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﺩﺍﺧﻠﯽ‬LG-P895 ‫ﮔﻮﺷﯽ‬ ‫ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﻪ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﮐﻠﻴﻪ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻫﺎی ﺩﻟﺨﻮﺍﻩ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺭﺍ ﭘﺨﺶ‬ ‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ٠١ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺟﻠﻮ‬ ‫< ﺯﺑﺎﻧﻪ‬...
Page 235 ‫ﻧﻤﺎﺩ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ‬ ‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺎ ﺟﮏ‬ .‫ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻫﺎ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‬ .‫ﻫﺪﺳﺖ، ﺟﻠﻮﻩ ﺻﻮﺗﯽ ﺩﺍﻟﺒﯽ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺷﻮﺩ‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ، ﻧﻤﺎﺩ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﺻﺪﺍ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺗﻤﺎﺷﺎی ﻓﻴﻠﻢ، ﮐﻠﻴﺪﻫﺎی‬ ‫ﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﻭ ﻧﻮﺍﺭ‬ ‫ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ...
Page 236 USB ‫ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻫﺎی ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺍﻧﺒﻮﻩ‬ .‫< ﺯﺑﺎﻧﻪ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎ < ﮔﺎﻟﺮی ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‬ ‫ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺘﯽ ﺍﺯ ﻧﻮﺍﺭﻫﺎی ﮐﺎﺗﺎﻟﻮگ ﺣﺎﻭی ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎی‬ ‫، ﺑﻪ‬ USB ‫ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﮐﺎﺑﻞ‬LG-P895 .‫ﭼﻨﺪﺭﺳﺎﻧﻪ ﺍی ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﺯ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‬ .‫ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‬ ‫ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ‬...
Page 237 ‫ﭘﺨﺶ ﺁﻫﻨﮓ‬ ‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺍﺑﺘﺪﺍی ﺁﻫﻨﮓ ﻗﺒﻠﯽ‬ < ‫< ﺯﺑﺎﻧﻪ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎ‬ ،‫ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ‬ ،‫ﺑﺮﮔﺮﺩﻳﺪ. ﺑﺮﺍی ﺑﺎﺯﮔﺸﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺗﺮﺍﻧﻪ ﻗﺒﻞ‬ .‫ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‬ .‫ﺩﻭ ﺑﺎﺭ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‬ .‫ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‬ ‫ﺗﺮﺍﻧﻪ ﻫﺎ‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﻣﺪﻳﺮﻳﺖ ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﺻﺪﺍی ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﯽ‬ .‫ﺗﺮﺍﻧﻪ...
Page 238 ‫ﭼﻨﺪ ﺭﺳﺎﻧﻪ ﺍی‬ ‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﻣﺘﻦ ﺁﻫﻨﮓ ﻫﺎ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ‬ ‫ﺣﻖ ﮐﭙﯽ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎی ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﯽ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ‬ :‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ‬ ‫ﺷﻮﺩ. ﺍﻳﻦ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺗﺮﺍﻧﻪ ﻫﺎﻳﯽ ﮐﻪ‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺖ ﺣﻔﺎﻇﺖ ﻗﻮﺍﻧﻴﻦ ﻣﻠﯽ ﻭ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻠﯽ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ‬ .‫ﻣﺘﻦ ﺁﻥ ﻫﺎ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻣﯽ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬ .‫ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬...
Page 239 ‫ﺑﺎ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺑﺮﭼﺴﺐ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺷﺪﻩ، ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻓﻮﺭﺍ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ‬ .‫ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺳﻔﺎﺭﺷﯽ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‬ .‫ﺭﺍ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‬ Tag+ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻧﻮﺷﺘﻦ‬ LG Tag+ < ‫< ﺯﺑﺎﻧﻪ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ‬ ‫ﺧﺎﻧﻪ ﺭﺳﺎﻧﻪ ﻫﺎ‬ .‫ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺧﺎﻧﻪ ﺭﺳﺎﻧﻪ ﻫﺎ‬...
Page 240 ‫ﭼﻨﺪ ﺭﺳﺎﻧﻪ ﺍی‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺧﺎﻧﻪ ﺭﺳﺎﻧﻪ ﻫﺎ‬ < ‫< ﺯﺑﺎﻧﻪ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎ < ﺧﺎﻧﻪ ﺭﺳﺎﻧﻪ ﻫﺎ‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‬ .‫ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺩﻟﺨﻮﺍﻩ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‬ !‫ﻧﮑﺘﻪ‬ ‫ ﺑﻪ ﻳﮏ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ‬MHL ‫ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﮐﺎﺑﻞ‬ < ‫ﻳﺎ ﻣﺎﻧﻴﺘﻮﺭ ﻭﺻﻞ ﮐﺮﺩﻳﺪ، ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﺧﺎﻧﻪ ﺭﺳﺎﻧﻪ ﻫﺎ‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ...
Page 241 ‫ﺩﻓﺘﺮ ﻳﺎﺩﺩﺍﺷﺖ‬ ‫ﺁﺷﻨﺎﻳﯽ ﺑﺎ ﺩﻓﺘﺮ ﻳﺎﺩﺩﺍﺷﺖ‬ ‫ﺑﺎ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺩﻓﺘﺮ ﻳﺎﺩﺩﺍﺷﺖ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺩﺍﻣﻨﻪ ﻭﺳﻴﻌﯽ ﺍﺯ‬ .‫ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺪﻳﺮﻳﺖ ﻭ ﺷﺨﺼﯽ ﺳﺎﺯی ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‬ ‫ﻧﻮﺷﺘﻦ ﻳﺎﺩﺩﺍﺷﺖ‬ ‫ﺭﺍ‬ ‫< ﺯﺑﺎﻧﻪ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎ < ﺩﻓﺘﺮ ﻳﺎﺩﺩﺍﺷﺖ‬ .‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‬ ‫ﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﻳﮏ ﻳﺎﺩﺩﺍﺷﺖ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ، ﻳﺎﺩﺩﺍﺷﺖ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ‬ .‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ...
Page 242 ‫ﺩﻓﺘﺮ ﻳﺎﺩﺩﺍﺷﺖ‬ ،+Social،‫، ﺍﻳﻤﻴﻞ‬Gmail ‫– ﺍﺯ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ‬ ‫– ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺧﻮﺍﻧﺪﻧﯽ ﻳﺎ ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ‬ ،+‫، ﮔﻮﮔﻞ‬Picasa ،‫ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ، ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﺭﺳﺎﻧﯽ‬ .‫ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‬ ‫ﻳﺎﺩﺩﺍﺷﺖ، ﻳﺎﺩﺩﺍﺷﺖ ﻓﻌﻠﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﺩﻳﮕﺮﺍﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺍﺷﺘﺮﺍک‬ ‫– ﺑﻪ ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺖ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺑﺮﮔﺮﺩﻳﺪ ﻳﺎ ﻣﺠﺪﺩ‬ .‫ﺑﮕﺬﺍﺭﻳﺪ‬ .‫ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‬ .‫– ﻳﺎﺩﺩﺍﺷﺖ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻓﻌﻠﯽ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‬ ‫–...
Page 243 ‫ﺷﺎﻣﻞ - ﺑﺎﺯی ﻫﺎ، ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎ، ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﺯﻣﻴﻨﻪ ﻭ ﺁﻫﻨﮓ‬ ‫ﻫﻨﻮﺯ ﺛﺒﺖ ﻧﺎﻡ ﻧﮑﺮﺩﻩ ﺍﻳﺪ، ﺭﻭی ﺛﺒﺖ ﻧﺎﻡ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ‬ LG ‫ﻫﺎی ﺯﻧﮓ - ﺭﺍ ﺍﺭﺍﺋﻪ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺑﺮﺍی ﮐﺎﺭﺑﺮﺍﻥ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ‬ ‫ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺖ‬LG SmartWorld ‫ﺯﺩﻩ ﻭ ﻋﻀﻮﻳﺖ‬ ‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﻓﺮﺻﺖ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺮﺍﻫﻢ ﻣﯽ ﺁﻭﺭﺩ ﮐﻪ ﺍﺯ ﺗﺠﺮﺑﻪ "ﺯﻧﺪﮔﯽ‬...
Page 244 LG SmartWorld ‫ﺩﺭ ﺗﺮﻓﻴﻌﺎﺕ ﻣﺎﻫﺎﻧﻪ‬ • ‫ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﮐﺮﺩ؟‬ .‫ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‬ LG ‫ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺮﻭﺭﮔﺮ ﻭﺏ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ، ﺑﻪ‬ .‫– ﻣﺤﺘﻮﺍ ﺭﺍ ﺟﺴﺘﺠﻮ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‬ SmartWorld (www.lgworld.com) .‫ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺳﯽ ﭘﻴﺪﺍ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﮐﺸﻮﺭ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‬ ،‫– ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮ ﺍﺳﺎﺱ ﻧﻮﻉ )ﻣﺜﻼ ﺑﺎﺯی‬...
Page 245 .‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ: ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻪ ﻭ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺸﮕﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‬ ‫ﻭﺭﻭﺩ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ – ﺷﻨﺎﺳﻪ ﻭ ﺭﻣﺰ ﻭﺭﻭﺩ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ‬ .‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‬ .‫• ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩﻫﺎی ﻣﻔﻴﺪ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﺭﺍ ﻧﻴﺰ ﺍﻣﺘﺤﺎﻥ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‬ (‫)ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺟﺰﺋﻴﺎﺕ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﺍ‬ ‫ ﺩﺭ ﻫﻤﻪ‬LG SmartWorld ‫ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ‬ :‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ‬ .‫ﻣﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﻳﺎ ﮐﺸﻮﺭﻫﺎ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻧﺒﺎﺷﺪ‬...
Page 246 ‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ. ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی‬ ،‫ﺯﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ: ﺯﻧﮓ ﻫﺸﺪﺍﺭ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺻﺎﻣﺖ‬ LG-P895 ،‫ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﺯﻧﮓ ﻫﺸﺪﺍﺭ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﺮﺩﻳﺪ‬ ‫ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﺻﺪﺍی ﺯﻧﮓ ﻫﺸﺪﺍﺭ، ﻣﺪﺕ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﻖ، ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ‬ ‫ﺑﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺍﻣﮑﺎﻥ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﯽ ﮐﻪ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺑﻪ ﺻﺪﺍ‬...
Page 247 ‫ﺭﻭی ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺨﯽ ﮐﻪ ﻣﯽ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﺭﻭﻳﺪﺍﺩی ﺑﻪ ﺁﻥ‬ ،– ،+) ‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﻣﺤﺎﺳﺒﺎﺕ ﺳﺎﺩﻩ، ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ‬ .‫ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‬ ‫ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ ﻭ‬ .‫، ﻳﺎ ÷( ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ = ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‬x ‫ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﻧﺎﻡ ﺭﺍ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ‬ ‫ﻧﺎﻡ...
Page 248 ‫ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎ‬ .‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‬ ‫ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺭﻭﻳﺪﺍﺩ ﺩﺭ ﺗﻘﻮﻳﻢ، ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ‬ .‫ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‬ ،‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﺁﺩﺭﺱ ﻭ ﺭﻣﺰ ﻭﺭﻭﺩ ﺍﻳﻤﻴﻞ‬ .‫ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‬Microsoft Exchange ‫ﮐﺎﺭﻫﺎ‬ .‫ﺑﺮﺭﺳﯽ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﻫﻤﮕﺎﻡ ﺳﺎﺯی ﻋﻼﻣﺖ ﺯﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬ MS Exchange ‫ﮐﺎﺭﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺷﺘﺮﺍک‬ Polaris Office ،‫ﻫﻤﮕﺎﻡ...
Page 249 ‫ﺍﺷﺘﺮﺍک ﮔﺬﺍﺭی ﻓﺎﻳﻞ‬ ‫ﻣﺪﻳﺮﻳﺖ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎ‬ ‫ ﻭﻳﮋﮔﯽ ﻫﺎی ﻣﺪﻳﺮﻳﺖ ﺁﺳﺎﻥ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ‬Polaris Office ‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﻭﻳﮋﮔﯽ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺍﻣﮑﺎﻥ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ‬ ‫ﻫﺎ ﺍﺯ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﮐﭙﯽ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ، ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﻭ ﺍﻟﺼﺎﻕ ﻭ ﺣﺬﻑ‬ .‫ﺧﻮﺩ ﺑﻪ ﺍﺷﺘﺮﺍک ﺑﮕﺬﺍﺭﻳﺪ‬ ‫ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎ ﻭ ﭘﻮﺷﻪ ﻫﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﮐﺎﺭﺑﺮﺍﻥ‬ ‫<...
Page 250 .‫ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﭘﺸﺘﻴﺒﺎﻥ ﺗﻬﻴﻪ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺑﺎﺯﻳﺎﺑﯽ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‬ ‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺗﻬﻴﻪ ﭘﺸﺘﻴﺒﺎﻥ ﺑﻴﻦ ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ﻫﺎی ﻫﻮﺷﻤﻨﺪ‬ ‫• ﺑﺮﺍی ﺗﻬﻴﻪ ﭘﺸﺘﻴﺒﺎﻥ ﺩﺳﺘﯽ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻫﺎی ﮔﻮﺷﯽ‬ ‫، ﻧﺴﺨﻪ ﻧﺮﻡ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭی ﻳﺎ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻋﺎﻣﻞ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ‬LG .‫ﻫﻮﺷﻤﻨﺪ‬ LG ‫ﭘﺸﺘﻴﺒﺎﻧﯽ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ. ﺑﻨﺎﺑﺮﺍﻳﻦ ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ﻫﻮﺷﻤﻨﺪ‬...
Page 251 ‫ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺭﻳﺰی ﺗﻬﻴﻪ ﭘﺸﺘﻴﺒﺎﻥ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺗﻬﻴﻪ ﭘﺸﺘﻴﺒﺎﻥ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻫﺎی ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ﻫﻮﺷﻤﻨﺪ‬ ‫ﻫﻤﭽﻨﻴﻦ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﺮ ﺍﺳﺎﺱ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﯽ‬ ‫< ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ‬ ‫< ﺯﺑﺎﻧﻪ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎ‬ .‫ﺧﻮﺩ، ﺗﻬﻴﻪ ﭘﺸﺘﻴﺒﺎﻥ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‬ ‫ﺳﭙﺲ ﭘﺸﺘﻴﺒﺎﻥ < ﭘﺸﺘﻴﺒﺎﻥ < ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺩﺍﺧﻠﯽ ﺭﺍ‬ :‫ﺑﺮﺍی...
Page 252 ‫ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎ‬ ‫ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ﮐﻨﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻫﺎﻳﯽ ﮐﻪ ﻣﯽ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻥ ﻫﺎ‬ ‫ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ < ﻭ‬ ‫< ﺯﺑﺎﻧﻪ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎ‬ ‫ﭘﺸﺘﻴﺒﺎﻥ ﺗﻬﻴﻪ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺍﺩﺍﻣﻪ‬ ‫ﺳﭙﺲ ﭘﺸﺘﻴﺒﺎﻥ < ﺑﺎﺯﻳﺎﺑﯽ < ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺩﺍﺧﻠﯽ ﺭﺍ‬ .‫ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﯽ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺷﻮﺩ‬ .‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ...
Page 253 ‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﭘﺸﺘﻴﺒﺎﻥ ﮐﺪﮔﺬﺍﺭی ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ، ﺭﻣﺰ ﻭﺭﻭﺩ‬ ‫ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﭘﺸﺘﻴﺒﺎﻥ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﻭ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻮ‬ .‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﮐﺪﮔﺬﺍﺭی ﺭﺍ ﺗﺎﻳﭗ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ < ﺍﻣﻨﻴﺖ < ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﺳﺎﺯی ﮐﺪﮔﺬﺍﺭی ﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ﺭﺍ ﻋﻼﻣﺖ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ. ﺑﺮﺍی ﺑﺎﺯﻳﺎﺑﯽ‬ ‫ﻭﻗﺘﯽ...
Page 254 ‫ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎ‬ :‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ‬ ‫ﻫﻤﭽﻨﻴﻦ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﭘﺸﺘﻴﺒﺎﻥ ﻫﺎی ﻗﺒﻠﯽ‬ ‫ﺭﺍ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﻓﻘﻂ ﭘﺸﺘﻴﺒﺎﻥ ﻫﺎی ﺍﺧﻴﺮ ﺭﺍ ﻧﮕﻪ‬ ‫ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﭘﺸﺘﻴﺒﺎﻥ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ‬ ‫ﺩﺍﺭﻳﺪ. ﻣﻨﻮ‬ ‫ﻭ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ < ﺗﻬﻴﻪ ﭘﺸﺘﻴﺒﺎﻥ ﺍﺯ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎ < ﺣﺬﻑ‬ ‫ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﭘﺸﺘﻴﺒﺎﻥ ﻫﺎی ﻗﺒﻠﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩ‬ .‫ﭘﺸﺘﻴﺒﺎﻥ...
Page 255 ‫ﻭﺏ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻧﻮﺍﺭ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ﻭﺏ‬ ‫ﺍﻳﻨﺘﺮﻧﺖ‬ .‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﻳﮏ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻘﺐ ﺑﺮﻭﻳﺪ‬ ،‫ﻣﺮﻭﺭﮔﺮ ﺩﻧﻴﺎﻳﯽ ﺭﻧﮕﺎﺭﻧﮓ ﻭ ﺳﺮﻳﻊ ﺍﺯ ﺑﺎﺯی ﻫﺎ‬ ‫ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﯽ، ﺍﺧﺒﺎﺭ، ﻭﺭﺯﺵ، ﺳﺮﮔﺮﻣﯽ ﻭ ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﺭﺍ‬ ،‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﻳﮏ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺟﻠﻮ ﺑﺮﻭﻳﺪ‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺑﺎﺭﮔﻴﺮی ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ. ﺩﺭ ﻫﺮ ﮐﺠﺎ‬ ‫ﺑﻪ...
Page 256 ‫ﻭﺏ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎ‬ ‫ﺩﺭﺧﻮﺍﺳﺖ ﺳﺎﻳﺖ ﺩﺳﮑﺘﺎپ – ﺑﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺍﻣﮑﺎﻥ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ‬ .‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻭﺏ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺩﺳﮑﺘﺎپ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‬ .‫ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‬ ‫ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻣﻄﺎﻟﻌﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺁﻓﻼﻳﻦ – ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻓﻌﻠﯽ‬ .‫ﻧﻮﺳﺎﺯی – ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻭﺏ ﻓﻌﻠﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺭﻭﺯ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‬ .‫ﺭﺍ...
Page 257 ‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺮﺧﯽ ﺍﺯ ﺷﺒﮑﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺑﯽ ﺳﻴﻢ‬ ‫ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ‬MAC ‫، ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺁﺩﺭﺱ‬MAC ‫ﺑﺎ ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮﻫﺎی‬ ‫ﺑﯽ ﺳﻴﻢ ﻭ ﺷﺒﮑﻪ ﻫﺎ‬ .‫ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺴﻴﺮﻳﺎﺏ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‬LG-P895 ‫ ﻭ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺪﻳﺮﻳﺖ‬Wi-Fi ‫ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻨﺠﺎ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ‬ ‫ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻭﺍﺳﻂ ﮐﺎﺭﺑﺮ‬MAC ‫ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺁﺩﺭﺱ‬...
Page 258 .‫ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‬ .‫ ﺭﺍ ﭘﻴﮑﺮﺑﻨﺪی ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‬Wi-Fi < ‫> ﺗﻤﺎﺱ‬ ‫ ﻳﮏ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ ﺑﺎ‬LG-P895 ‫ – ﮔﻮﺷﯽ‬NFC ‫ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﻫﺪﺍﻳﺖ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ‬ ‫ )ﺍﺭﺗﺒﺎﻁ ﺍﺯ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺧﻴﻠﯽ‬NFC .‫ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﺍﺳﺖ‬NFC ‫ﻭ ﺳﺎﻳﺮ ﻭﻳﮋﮔﯽ ﻫﺎی ﺧﺎﺹ ﺍﺭﺍﺋﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﺷﺒﮑﻪ‬...
Page 259 ‫ – ﺑﺎ ﺩﺭ ﮐﻨﺎﺭ ﻫﻢ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ‬Beam ‫ﺁﻧﺪﺭﻭﻳﺪ‬ ‫ﺑﺎ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ، ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺑﺮﭼﺴﺐ ﺩﺭ‬ ‫ﻫﺎ )ﭘﺸﺖ ﺑﻪ ﭘﺸﺖ(، ﻳﮏ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻭﺏ، ﻳﮏ ﻭﻳﺪﻳﻮ ﻳﺎ‬ .‫ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‬ ‫ﺳﺎﻳﺮ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺑﻪ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ‬ ‫: ﺍﺯ...
Page 260 ‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ‬ ،‫ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﺻﺪﺍ – ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﺻﺪﺍی ﺁﻫﻨﮓ ﺯﻧﮓ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ‬ ،‫ﺷﺒﮑﻪ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ – ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺭﻭﻣﻴﻨﮓ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻫﺎ‬ ،‫ﺻﺪﺍی ﺍﻋﻼﻥ، ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻭ ﺑﺎﺧﻮﺭﺩ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺑﯽ، ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﯽ‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺷﺒﮑﻪ ﻭ ﺍﭘﺮﺍﺗﻮﺭﻫﺎ، ﻧﺎﻡ ﻫﺎی ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﺩﺳﺘﻴﺎﺑﯽ‬ ‫ﻓﻴﻠﻢ، ﺑﺎﺯی ﻫﺎ ﻭ ﺳﺎﻳﺮ ﺭﺳﺎﻧﻪ ﻫﺎ، ﻫﺸﺪﺍﺭﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺪﻳﺮﻳﺖ‬ .‫( ﻭ...
Page 261 .‫ﺑﺎﺯﺧﻮﺭﺩ ﻟﺮﺯﺷﯽ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺑﯽ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‬ ‫ﺻﺪﺍﻫﺎی ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺩﻓﺘﺮﭼﮥ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﮔﻴﺮی – ﺑﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ‬ ‫ﺍﻣﮑﺎﻥ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺭﺍ ﻃﻮﺭی ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﮐﻪ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ‬ < ‫> ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﮐﻠﻴﺪ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﮔﻴﺮی، ﮐﻠﻴﺪﻫﺎ ﺻﺪﺍ‬ .‫ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﻳﯽ - ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﻳﯽ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‬ .‫ﺑﺪﻫﻨﺪ‬...
Page 262 ‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ‬ < ‫> ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻗﻔﻞ‬ ‫ﻧﻮﺭ ﮐﻠﻴﺪ ﺟﻠﻮ – ﻣﺪﺕ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﺑﻮﺩﻥ ﮐﻠﻴﺪ ﺟﻠﻮ ﺭﺍ‬ .‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‬ ‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ – ﻳﮏ ﺍﻟﮕﻮی ﻗﻔﻞ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺑﺮﺍی‬ ‫ﺍﻳﻤﻨﯽ ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ. ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﻪ ﺍی ﺍﺯ‬ ‫ﺣﺮﮐﺖ ﮐﺎﻟﻴﺒﺮﺍﺳﻴﻮﻥ ﺳﻨﺴﻮﺭ – ﺑﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺍﻣﮑﺎﻥ ﻣﯽ‬ ‫ﺻﻔﺤﺎﺕ...
Page 263 ‫ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺣﺮﮐﺖ – ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺖ ﺣﺴﮕﺮ ﺣﺮﮐﺘﯽ‬ ‫ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﻫﺎ ﻭ ﻣﻴﺎﻧﺒﺮﻫﺎ – ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﻫﺎ ﻭ ﻣﻴﺎﻧﺒﺮﻫﺎی‬ .‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﻭ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺁﺯﻣﺎﻳﺶ ﻭ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‬ .‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺭﺍ ﺳﻔﺎﺭﺷﯽ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‬ ‫ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﻭﺭﻭﺩی ﺑﯽ ﺻﺪﺍ – ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺭﺍ ﻭﺍژﮔﻮﻥ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ‬ ‫ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ...
Page 264 ‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ‬ .(‫ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻫﺎ ﮐﻢ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ )ﻭﻟﯽ ﺍﺯ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻧﻤﯽ ﺭﻭﺩ‬ < ‫> ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﻧﻴﺮﻭ‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻨﺠﺎ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺭﺍ ﻣﺪﻳﺮﻳﺖ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩ‬ < ‫> ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﻣﻮﻗﻌﻴﺖ ﻣﮑﺎﻧﯽ‬ ‫ﺻﺮﻓﻪ ﺟﻮﻳﯽ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻧﺮژی ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺭﺳﯽ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ. ﻫﻤﭽﻨﻴﻦ ﻣﯽ‬ ‫ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ...
Page 265 ‫ﻣﻨﺎﺑﻊ ﻧﺎﺷﻨﺎﺧﺘﻪ – ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﭘﻴﺶ ﻓﺮﺽ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻧﺼﺐ‬ ‫ﺟﺴﺘﺠﻮی ﻣﻮﻗﻌﻴﺖ ﻣﮑﺎﻧﯽ ﻭ ﮔﻮﮔﻞ – ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ‬ .‫ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎی ﻏﻴﺮﺑﺎﺯﺍﺭی‬ ‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺍﻳﻦ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ، ﮔﻮﮔﻞ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻮﻗﻌﻴﺖ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺑﻬﺒﻮﺩ‬ .‫ﻧﺘﺎﻳﺞ ﺟﺴﺘﺠﻮ ﻭ ﺳﺎﻳﺮ ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‬ ‫ﮔﻮﺍﻫﯽ ﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎی ﻣﻌﺘﺒﺮ – ﮔﻮﺍﻫﯽ ﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎی ﻣﻌﺘﺒﺮ‬ .‫...
Page 266 ‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻭ ﻫﻤﻪ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺣﺬﻑ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ. ﺍﮔﺮ ﺑﺪﻳﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ‬ < ‫> ﭘﺸﺘﻴﺒﺎﻥ ﮔﻴﺮی ﻭ ﺑﺎﺯﻧﺸﺎﻧﯽ‬ ‫ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﺯﻧﺸﺎﻧﯽ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ، ﺍﺯ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺧﻮﺍﺳﺘﻪ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻫﻤﻴﻦ‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺪﻳﺮﻳﺖ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﻭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻫﺎی‬ ‫ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻭﻟﻴﻦ ﺑﺎﺭ ﺍﺯ‬ .‫ﺧﻮﺩ...
Page 267 ‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺑﻮﺩﻥ، ﺑﻪ ﭘﻼﮔﻴﻦ ﻫﺎی‬ :‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ‬ .‫ ﺍﻣﮑﺎﻥ ﭘﺬﻳﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ‬Wi-Fi .‫ﺍﺿﺎﻓﯽ ﻧﻴﺎﺯ ﺍﺳﺖ‬ LG ‫ – ﺍﻳﻦ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ‬PC Suite .‫ ﻋﻼﻣﺖ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ‬Wi-Fi ‫ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ‬PC Suite < ‫> ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ‬ LG PC ‫ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﺮﺍی‬Wi-Fi ‫ﻟﻄﻔﺎ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﮐﻪ ﺷﺒﮑﻪ‬...
Page 268 ‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﺭﺗﻘﺎ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ. ﺍﻳﻦ ﻭﻳﮋﮔﯽ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺍﺳﺖ ﮐﻪ‬ < ‫> ﺩﺭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ‬ ‫ ﻧﺴﺨﻪ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺗﺮ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ‬LG ‫ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺣﻘﻮﻗﯽ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﻧﺴﺨﻪ ﻧﺮﻡ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ‬ .‫ﺷﻤﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺱ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﻫﺪ‬ .‫ﻭ ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺖ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺭﺳﯽ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‬...
Page 269 .‫ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺱ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﻫﺪ‬ ‫ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺣﻖ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮ ﺧﻮﺩ ﻣﺤﻔﻮﻅ ﻣﯽ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﻪ‬LG :‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ‬ ‫ﻧﺴﺨﻪ ﻧﺮﻡ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ‬ ‫ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﺑﻪ ﺭﻭﺯ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ ﺭﺍ ﻃﺒﻖ ﺻﻼﺣﺪﻳﺪ ﺧﻮﺩ‬ ‫ﺯﻳﺮ ﺑﺮﺭﺳﯽ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ: ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ < ﺩﺭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ < ﺑﻪ‬...
Page 270 ،‫ﺭﻭﺯﺁﻭﺭی ﻧﺮﻡ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺍﺯ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺑﺮﻭﺩ. ﺑﻨﺎﺑﺮﺍﻳﻦ‬ ‫ ﺭﺍ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻣﯽ‬DivX ‫ ﺍﺳﺖ ﮐﻪ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﺍی‬Certified ® ‫ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻪ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺑﻪ ﺭﻭﺯﺁﻭﺭی ﻧﺮﻡ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ‬LG ‫ﮐﻨﺪ. ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﻭ ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺳﯽ ﺑﻪ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭﻫﺎی‬ .‫ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺧﻮﺩ، ﺍﺯ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻫﺎی ﺷﺨﺼﯽ ﭘﺸﺘﻴﺒﺎﻥ ﺗﻬﻴﻪ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‬...
Page 271 ‫: ﺍﻳﻦ‬DIVX VIDEO-ON-DEMAND ‫ﺩﺭﺑﺎﺭﻩ‬ ‫ ﺑﻮﺩﻩ ﻭ‬DivX Certified ‫ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺩﺍﺭﺍی ﻣﺠﻮﺯ‬ ® DivX Video-on-Demand‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﭘﺨﺶ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻫﺎی‬ ‫ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺗﺤﺖ ﻟﻴﺴﺎﻧﺲ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﻫﺎی ﺛﺒﺖ ﺍﻳﺎﻻﺕ‬ ‫(( ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺛﺒﺖ ﻧﺎﻡ ﺷﻮﺩ. ﺑﺮﺍی ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺖ ﮐﺪ ﺛﺒﺖ‬VOD ;5,974,380 ;5,956,674 :‫ﻣﺘﺤﺪﻩ ﺁﻣﺮﻳﮑﺎ‬ ‫ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻨﻮی ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ‬DivX VOD ‫ﻧﺎﻡ، ﺑﺨﺶ‬ ‫535,784,6 ﻭ...
Page 272 ‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ‬ Dolby Mobile Dolby ‫ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺗﺤﺖ ﻟﻴﺴﺎﻧﺲ‬ ‫ ﻋﻼﺋﻢ‬D ‫ ﻭ ﻋﻼﻣﺖ ﺩﻭ‬Laboratories. Dolby .‫ ﻣﯽ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‬Dolby Laboratories ‫ﺗﺠﺎﺭی‬...
Page 273 ‫ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ ﻭﺻﻞ ﻳﺎ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺭﺍ‬ .‫ﻗﻄﻊ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‬ ‫• ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﻭ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺩﺭ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﻭﺍﻗﻌﯽ: ﺑﺎ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻪ‬ ‫ ﺭﺍ ﺭﺍﻩ‬LG Home Panorama ‫ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ‬ ‫ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ، ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺭﺍ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ‬ ‫ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯی ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻳﺎ ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﺑﺮﮔﺰﻳﺪﻩ‬...
Page 274 LG On-Screen Phone ‫• ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ )ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ(: ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ‬ ‫• ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺑﺎ ﻣﺎﻭﺱ: ﺑﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺍﻣﮑﺎﻥ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ ﮐﻪ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ‬ ‫ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ. ﻓﻘﻂ ﮐﺎﻓﯽ‬ ‫ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺎﻭﺱ ﻭ ﮐﻠﻴﮏ ﻭ‬...
Page 275 LG Home (www.lg.com) ‫ﺍﺯ‬ .‫ﻭ ﮐﺸﻮﺭ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‬ ‫ﺑﻪ ﭘﺸﺘﻴﺒﺎﻧﯽ< ﭘﺸﺘﻴﺒﺎﻧﯽ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ < ﺭﻓﺘﻪ ﻣﺪﻝ‬ OSP ‫( ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ < ﺭﻭی‬LG-P895) ‫( ﮐﻠﻴﮏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ‬On-Screen Phone)a ‫ﺑﺎﺭﮔﻴﺮی ﺷﻮﺩ. ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ‬ ‫ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ ﻧﺼﺐ‬On-Screen Phone...
Page 276 ‫ﻟﻮﺍﺯﻡ ﺟﺎﻧﺒﯽ‬ (.‫ ﺩﺭ ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺱ ﻣﯽ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ. )ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﺷﺮﺡ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺯﻳﺮ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭی ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‬LG-P895 ‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﻟﻮﺍﺯﻡ ﺟﺎﻧﺒﯽ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺑﺎ‬ ‫ﺷﮑﺎﻑ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ‬ ‫ﻫﺪﺳﺖ ﺍﺳﺘﺮﻳﻮ‬ ‫ﺷﺎﺭژﺭ ﻣﺴﺎﻓﺮﺗﯽ‬ Micro- USIM +LG Tag ‫ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎی ﮐﺎﺭﺑﺮ‬ ‫ﮐﺎﺑﻞ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻫﺎ‬ ‫ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ‬ ‫ ﻭ‬LG-P895 ‫ﺑﯿﺸﺘﺮی...
Page 277 ‫ﻫﺸﺪﺍﺭ: ﺑﺎ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻧﮑﻨﻴﺪ ﻭ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺷﻴﺎء ﻧﻮک ﺗﻴﺰ ﺭﻭی ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﮑﺸﻴﺪ‬ :‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ‬ .‫ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‬LG ‫• ﻫﻤﻴﺸﻪ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺍﺯ ﻟﻮﺍﺯﻡ ﺟﺎﻧﺒﯽ ﺍﺻﻞ‬ .‫• ﻋﺪﻡ ﺭﻋﺎﻳﺖ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﺻﻞ ﻣﻬﻢ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺿﻤﺎﻧﺖ ﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺭﺟﻪ ﺍﻋﺘﺒﺎﺭ ﺳﺎﻗﻂ ﮐﻨﺪ‬...
Page 278 ‫ﻋﻴﺐ ﻳﺎﺑﯽ‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻓﺼﻞ ﺑﺮﺧﯽ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺸﮑﻼﺗﯽ ﮐﻪ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺩﺭ ﺣﻴﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ﺑﺎ ﺁﻥ ﻣﻮﺍﺟﻪ ﺷﻮﻳﺪ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺭﺳﯽ ﻣﯽ‬ ‫ﮐﻨﻴﻢ. ﺑﺮﺧﯽ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺸﮑﻼﺕ ﻣﺴﺘﻠﺰﻡ ﺁﻥ ﺍﺳﺖ ﮐﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺷﺒﮑﻪ ﻣﺨﺎﺑﺮﺍﺗﯽ ﺧﻮﺩ ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﻪ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ، ﺍﻣﺎ ﺑﺴﻴﺎﺭی ﺍﺯ ﺁﻥ ﻫﺎ‬ .‫ﺳﺎﺩﻩ...
Page 279 ‫ﺭﺍﻩ ﺣﻞ ﻫﺎی ﻣﻤﮑﻦ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﺖ ﻫﺎی ﺍﺣﺘﻤﺎﻟﯽ‬ ‫ﭘﻴﺎﻡ‬ ‫ﺑﻪ ﻃﺮﻑ ﻳﮏ ﭘﻨﺠﺮﻩ ﻳﺎ ﺑﻪ ﻳﮏ ﻣﺤﻴﻂ ﺑﺎﺯ ﺑﺮﻭﻳﺪ. ﻧﻘﺸﻪ‬ ‫ﺳﻴﮕﻨﺎﻝ ﺿﻌﻴﻒ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻳﺎ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ‬ .‫ﭘﻮﺷﺶ ﺍﭘﺮﺍﺗﻮﺭ ﺷﺒﮑﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺭﺳﯽ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‬ .‫ﺍﺯ ﺷﺒﮑﻪ ﺗﺤﺖ ﭘﻮﺷﺶ ﻫﺴﺘﻴﺪ‬ ‫ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺷﺒﮑﻪ‬ /‫ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ‬ 6 ‫...
Page 280 ‫ﻋﻴﺐ ﻳﺎﺑﯽ‬ ‫ﺭﺍﻩ ﺣﻞ ﻫﺎی ﻣﻤﮑﻦ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﺖ ﻫﺎی ﺍﺣﺘﻤﺎﻟﯽ‬ ‫ﭘﻴﺎﻡ‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﮐﺪ ﺍﻣﻨﻴﺘﯽ، ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﺎ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻣﺠﺪﺩ ﮐﺪ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ، ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﮐﺪ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺮﺍﻣﻮﺵ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﺍﻳﺪ، ﺑﺎ ﺷﺒﮑﻪ ﻣﺨﺎﺑﺮﺍﺗﯽ ﺧﻮﺩ‬ .‫ﺗﺄﻳﻴﺪ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‬ ‫ﮐﺪﻫﺎ ﻳﮑﺴﺎﻥ‬ .‫ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ‬ ‫ﻧﻴﺴﺘﻨﺪ‬ ‫ﺩﻭ...
Page 281 ‫ﺭﺍﻩ ﺣﻞ ﻫﺎی ﻣﻤﮑﻦ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﺖ ﻫﺎی ﺍﺣﺘﻤﺎﻟﯽ‬ ‫ﭘﻴﺎﻡ‬ .‫ﺷﺒﮑﻪ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺠﺎﺯ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ‬ ‫ﺧﻄﺎی ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﮔﻴﺮی‬ ‫ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ‬Micro-USIM .‫ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩﻳﺖ ﻫﺎی ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺭﺳﯽ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‬ ‫ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﻫﺎ‬ .‫ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‬ ‫ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ‬ ‫ﺑﺎ ﺷﺒﮑﻪ ﻣﺨﺎﺑﺮﺍﺗﯽ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﻳﺎ ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩﻳﺖ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ‬ ‫ﺑﻪ...
Page 282 ‫ﻋﻴﺐ ﻳﺎﺑﯽ‬ ‫ﺭﺍﻩ ﺣﻞ ﻫﺎی ﻣﻤﮑﻦ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﺖ ﻫﺎی ﺍﺣﺘﻤﺎﻟﯽ‬ ‫ﭘﻴﺎﻡ‬ ‫ﮐﻠﻴﺪ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ/ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﻣﺪﺕ ﮐﻮﺗﺎﻫﯽ‬ .‫ﺣﺪﺍﻗﻞ ﺩﻭ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ ﮐﻠﻴﺪ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ/ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‬ .‫ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﻮﺩ‬ ‫ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ‬ ‫ﻧﻤﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺭﺍ ﺷﺎﺭژ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ. ﻧﺸﺎﻧﮕﺮ ﺷﺎﺭژ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺸﮕﺮ‬ .‫ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺷﺎﺭژ ﻧﻤﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‬ .‫ﺑﺮﺭﺳﯽ...
Page 283 .‫ﺷﺎﺭژﺭ ﻭ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺁﻥ ﺑﻪ ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺭﺳﯽ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‬ ‫ﻣﺸﮑﻞ ﻣﺨﺎﻃﺐ‬ ‫ﺧﻄﺎی ﺷﺎﺭژ‬ .‫ﺷﺎﺭژﺭ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﭘﺮﻳﺰ ﺩﻳﮕﺮی ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ‬ ‫ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﻭﻟﺘﺎژ‬ .‫ﺷﺎﺭژﺭ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‬ ‫ﺷﺎﺭژﺭ ﺧﺮﺍﺏ ﺍﺳﺖ‬ .‫ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‬LG ‫ﻓﻘﻂ ﺍﺯ ﻟﻮﺍﺯﻡ ﺟﺎﻧﺒﯽ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ‬ ‫ﺍﺯ ﺷﺎﺭژﺭ ﺍﺷﺘﺒﺎﻫﯽ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‬...
Page 284 ‫ﻋﻴﺐ ﻳﺎﺑﯽ‬ ‫ﺭﺍﻩ ﺣﻞ ﻫﺎی ﻣﻤﮑﻦ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﺖ ﻫﺎی ﺍﺣﺘﻤﺎﻟﯽ‬ ‫ﭘﻴﺎﻡ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻮی ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺭﺳﯽ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺑﻠﻴﺖ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﮔﻴﺮی ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ‬ ‫ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﻣﺠﺎﺯ‬ .‫ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‬ .‫ﺍﺳﺖ‬ ‫ﻧﻴﺴﺖ‬ ‫ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺖ/ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ‬ ‫ ﻭ‬SMS .‫ﭼﻨﺪ ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺣﺬﻑ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﭘﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ‬ ‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ...
Page 285 ‫ﺭﺍﻩ ﺣﻞ ﻫﺎی ﻣﻤﮑﻦ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﺖ ﻫﺎی ﺍﺣﺘﻤﺎﻟﯽ‬ ‫ﭘﻴﺎﻡ‬ ‫ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﺗﻤﺎﺳﯽ‬ ،‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﺍﺯ ﻫﺮ ﻧﻮﻉ ﮐﻴﻒ ﻳﺎ ﻧﻮﺍﺭ ﻣﺤﺎﻓﻆ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‬ ‫ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺖ ﻣﯽ‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺭﺳﯽ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﮐﻪ ﻧﺎﺣﻴﻪ ﺍﻃﺮﺍﻑ ﺣﺴﮕﺮ ﻧﻮﺭی ﭘﻮﺷﻴﺪﻩ‬ ‫ﺍﺷﮑﺎﻝ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺴﮕﺮ ﻧﻮﺭی‬ ‫ﮐﻨﻢ، ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‬ ‫ﻧﺸﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ. ﻣﻄﻤﺌﻦ ﺷﻮﻳﺪ ﮐﻪ ﻧﺎﺣﻴﻪ ﺍﻃﺮﺍﻑ ﺣﺴﮕﺮ ﻧﻮﺭی‬ ‫ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ...
Page 286 ‫ﻋﻴﺐ ﻳﺎﺑﯽ‬ ‫ﺭﺍﻩ ﺣﻞ ﻫﺎی ﻣﻤﮑﻦ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﺖ ﻫﺎی ﺍﺣﺘﻤﺎﻟﯽ‬ ‫ﭘﻴﺎﻡ‬ ‫ﺑﻪ ﺭﻭﺯﺁﻭﺭی ﻧﺮﻡ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺳﺎﻳﺖ ﻭﺏ ﺳﺎﻳﺖ‬ ‫ﺧﺎﺗﻤﻪ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﻳﺎ‬ ‫ﺍﺷﮑﺎﻝ ﻣﺘﻨﺎﻭﺏ ﺩﺭ ﻧﺮﻡ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ‬ .‫ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‬ ‫ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩﻳﺖ‬...
Page 287 • Copyright ©2012 LG Electronics, Inc. All rights reserved. LG and the LG logo are registered trademarks of LG Group and its related entities. All other trademarks are the property of their respective owners.
Page 288: Table Of Contents
Contents Guidelines for safe and efﬁ cient use ..7 Returning to recently-used applications ...46 Notiﬁ cation drawer .........46 Getting to know your phone ....19 Viewing the status bar ......47 Device components ........32 Onscreen keyboard ........51 QuickMemo ...........36 Entering accented letters ......51 Installing the Micro-USIM card ....38 Google account set up ......53 Charging your phone ......39...
Page 289 To rename or secure your portable Call settings ..........69 hotspot ..........59 Contacts ..........72 Using the Wi-Fi Cast.......60 Searching for a contact ......72 Enabling Wi-Fi Direct to share through Adding a new contact......72 SmartShare ...........61 Favourite contacts ........72 Using SmartShare ........62 Moving contacts from your Old Device to Calls ............67 your New Device ........73...
Page 290 Contents E-mail .............78 Shooting a quick video ......89 After shooting a video ......89 Managing an email account ....78 Using the advanced settings ....90 Email account screen ......79 Adjusting the volume when viewing Working with account folders ....80 a video ..........91 Composing and sending email ....80 Video Wiz ..........92 Camera ...........82...
Page 291 Back up your smart phone data ....110 LG SmartWorld ........103 Scheduling automatic backups .....110 Restoring smart phone data ....111 How to Get to LG SmartWorld from Your Phone ..........103 The web ..........114 How to use LG SmartWorld ....104 Internet ..........114...
Page 292 Contents Using the web toolbar ......114 LG On-Screen Phone ......131 Using options ........115 On-Screen Phone icons ......131 On-Screen Phone features ....131 Settings ..........116 How to install On-Screen Phone WIRELESS & NETWORKS......116 on your PC ..........132 DEVICE ..........119 PERSONAL ..........123 Accessories ..........133 SYSTEM ..........125...
Page 293: Guidelines For Safe And Efﬁ Cient Use
Radio wave exposure and Specific Absorption certified power level in all used frequency Rate (SAR) information. bands. This mobile phone model LG-P895 has been • While there may be differences between designed to comply with applicable safety the SAR levels of various LG phone models, requirements for exposure to radio waves.
Page 294 Guidelines for safe and efﬁ cient use • The SAR limit recommended by the worn operation, it should not contain metal International Commission on Non-Ionizing and should position the product at least Radiation Protection (ICNIRP) is 2 W/kg 1.5 cm away from your body. In order to averaged over 10g of tissue.
Page 295 Product care and maintenance • Repairs under warranty, at LG's discretion, may include replacement parts or boards that are either new or reconditioned, WARNING provided that they have functionality equal to Only use batteries, chargers and that of the parts being replaced.
Page 296 Guidelines for safe and efﬁ cient use • Switch off the phone in any area where you • Use a dry cloth to clean the exterior of the are required to by special regulations. For unit (do not use solvents such as benzene, example, do not use your phone in hospitals thinner or alcohol).
Page 297 • Do not tap the screen with a sharp object as in the absence of adequate ventilation it may damage the phone. may result in discomfort or minor burns. Therefore, use care when handling your • Do not expose the phone to liquid or phone during or immediately after operation.
Page 298 Guidelines for safe and efﬁ cient use Efficient phone operation Road safety Electronics devices Check the laws and regulations on the use of mobile phones in the area when you drive. All mobile phones may receive interference, which could affect performance. •...
Page 299 portable wireless equipment. It can cause on or off the handset close to your ear. We also the air bag to fail or cause serious injury due recommend that music and call volumes are to improper performance. set to a reasonable level. •...
Page 300 Guidelines for safe and efﬁ cient use Glass Parts Blasting area Some parts of your mobile device are made Do not use the phone where blasting is in of glass. This glass could break if your mobile progress. Observe restrictions and follow any device is dropped on a hard surface or receives regulations or rules.
Page 301 In aircraft Emergency calls Wireless devices can cause interference in Emergency calls may not be available on all aircraft. mobile networks. Therefore you should never depend solely on your phone for emergency • Turn your mobile phone off before boarding calls.
Page 302 Guidelines for safe and efﬁ cient use • Use only LG batteries and chargers. LG the bathroom. chargers are designed to maximise the • Do not leave the battery in hot or cold battery life. places, as this may deteriorate battery •...
Page 303 DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY socket after the phone is fully charged to Hereby, LG Electronics declares save unnecessary power consumption of that this LG-P895 product is in the charger. compliance with the essential • Actual battery life will depend on network...
Page 304 Guidelines for safe and efﬁ cient use Regulatory and Safety Notice: Open Source Software Go to "System settings > About To obtain the corresponding source phone > Regulatory and Safety" to code under GPL, LGPL, MPL and get regulatory and safety information other open source licences, please visit http://opensource.lge.com/ All referred licence terms, disclaimers...
Page 305: Getting To Know Your Phone
Getting to know your phone Please check to see whether any problems you To uninstall applications: encountered with your phone are described in Touch > Apps tab > Settings > Apps this section before taking the phone for service from the DEVICE category. or calling a service representative.
Page 306 Getting to know your phone Before you start using the phone, please read this! Extending your phone's battery life: To check the battery power level: • Turn off radio communications you are not • Touch > Apps tab > Settings > About using.
Page 307 Battery usage time is displayed at the bottom 4. Before installing an open of the screen. It tells you how long it has been source application and OS since you last connected your phone to a power source or, if currently connected, how long the WARNING phone was last running on battery power.
Page 308 Getting to know your phone 5. Using unlock pattern WARNING Set unlock pattern to secure your phone. Touch To protect your phone and personal > Apps tab > Settings > Lock screen data, only download applications from DEVICE > Select screen lock > Pattern. from trusted sources, such as Play This opens a screen that guide you through Store™.
Page 309 When you can’t recall your unlock Pattern, WARNING PIN, or Password: Precautions to take when using < If you have forgotten pattern > pattern lock. If you logged in to your Google account on the It is very important to remember the phone but failed to enter the correct pattern unlock pattern you set.
Page 310 If you have not logged in Volume Down key. Google Account and forgot Unlock Pattern, you need to enter Backup Once LG Logo appears on the screen, PIN. release all Keys. After some seconds, Software allows you to select factory reset function in the Android...
Page 311 Scroll the list by Volume keys and select it 7. Opening and switching by Power/Lock key. applications Multitasking is easy with Android because you WARNING can keep more than one application running If you perform a Hard Reset, all user at the same time.
Page 312 8. Installing PC Software (LG applications: PC Suite) Simply press Recent apps key "LG PC Suite" PC Application is a program that To stop applications: helps you connect your device to a PC via an Touch > Apps tab > Settings > Apps USB cable and Wi-Fi.
Page 313 Go to Support > MOBILE SUPPORT > LG • Play multimedia contents of your PC from Mobile Phones > Select the Model (LG- your device. P895) or Go to Support > Mobile Phone NOTE: You can use the Help menu Support > Select the Model (LG-P895).
Page 314 "LG PC Suite" PC software. • Required software: LG integrated drivers, Windows Media Player 10 or later System Requirements for "LG PC Suite" PC software NOTE: LG Integrated USB Driver • OS: Windows XP 32 bit(Service pack 2),...
Page 315 The procedure is as follows: with your PC using the USB cable, Connect your device to PC. (Use an USB you need to install LG PC Suite onto cable or Wi-Fi connection.) your PC. After connection, run the program and...
Page 316 Open the memory folder on your PC. You Hold your mobile phone vertically, as you would can view the mass storage content on your a regular phone. The LG-P895 has an internal PC and transfer the ﬁ les. antenna. Be careful not to scratch or damage Copy the ﬁ...
Page 317 While making/receiving calls or sending/ receiving data, avoid holding the lower part of the phone where the antenna is located. Doing so may affect call quality. 12. When the screen freezes If the screen freezes or the phone does not respond when you try to operate it: Press and hold the Power/Lock key for 10 seconds to turn it off.
Page 318: Device Components
Getting to know your phone Device components Power/Lock key Earpiece • Switch your phone on/off by Proximity sensor pressing and holding this key. Camera lens • Short press to lock/unlock the screen. Home key Recent app key Return to the home screen View the recently used application list.
Page 319 NOTE: Proximity sensor WARNING When receiving and making calls, the Placing a heavy object on the phone proximity sensor automatically turns or sitting on it can damage the LCD the backlight off and locks the touch and touch screen functions. Do not screen by sensing when the phone is cover the LCD proximity sensor with near your ear.
Page 320 Getting to know your phone Volume keys QuickMemo Charger/USB port/ Hotkey MHL port • In the home screen: Control ringer volume. • During a call: Control your earpiece volume. • When playing a track: Control Power/Lock key Earphone volume continuously. Jack Microphone Micro-USIM card slot...
Page 321 Camera lens WARNING Flash Encloses the battery compartment. Please do not open the back cover. Speaker...
Page 322: Quickmemo
Getting to know your phone QuickMemo Use QuickMemo to practically and efficiently create memos during a call, with a saved picture or on the current phone screen. Enter the QuickMemo Select the desired menu Touch to Save the screen by pressing option from Pen type, memo with the current QuickMemo Hotkey...
Page 323 – Send or share the current QuickMemo NOTE: Please use a fingertip while to others. using the QuickMemo function. Do – Save the memo with the current screen. not use your fingernail. Viewing the saved QuickMemo Using the QuickMemo options Touch Gallery and select the QuickMemo While using the QuickMemo function, you can album or Touch Notebook and select the...
Page 324: Installing The Micro-Usim Card
Getting to know your phone Installing the Micro-USIM card Before you can start exploring your new phone, you'll need to set it up. To insert the Micro-USIM card: Open the Micro-USIM card slot Cover by Pin. Slide the Micro-USIM card into the Micro-USIM card slot.
Page 325: Charging Your Phone
Charging your phone The charger connector is at the top of the phone. Insert the charger and plug it into an electrical outlet. NOTE: The battery must be fully charged initially to improve battery lifetime.
Page 326: Locking And Unlocking The Screen
This helps to prevent accidental touches and unlock your home screen. The last screen you saves battery power. viewed will open. When you are not using the LG-P895, press the Power/Lock key to lock your phone. Secure your lock screen...
Page 327 To set an Unlock Pattern, PIN or Password NOTE: for the first time: Precautions to take when using • Touch > Apps tab > Settings > Lock pattern lock. screen > Select screen lock > None, It is very important to remember the Swipe, Face Unlock, Pattern, PIN or unlock pattern you set.
Page 328 Getting to know your phone When you cannot recall your unlock pattern: If you logged in to your Google account on the phone but failed to enter the correct pattern 5 times, tap the Forgot pattern button. You are then required to log in with your Google account to unlock your phone.
Page 329: Your Home Screen
Your Home screen Touch screen tips NOTE: Here are some tips on how to navigate around • To select an item, touch the centre your phone. of the icon. Touch – To choose a menu/option or open an • Do not press too hard; the touch screen is sensitive enough to pick application, touch it.
Page 330: Home
Your Home screen Home Touch the Phone icon to bring up the touch screen dialpad to make a call. Simply swipe your finger to the left or right to Touch the Contacts icon to open your view the panels. You can customise each panel contacts.
Page 331: Customising The Home Screen
application, simply touch the icon in the In the Add Mode menu, select items you applications list. want to add. You will then see added items on the home screen. Customising the Home screen Drag it to the location you want and lift You can customise your home screen by adding your ﬁ...
Page 332: Returning To Recently-Used Applications
Your Home screen Returning to recently-used applications Touch the Recent app key. The screen displays a pop-up with icons of applications you used recently. Touch an icon to open the application. Or touch the Back key to return to your previous screen.
Page 333: Viewing The Status Bar
Airplane mode, Auto-rotate screen, Brightness, Icon Description Data enabled or Portable Wi-Fi hotspot. No Micro-USIM card Viewing the status bar The status bar uses different icons to display No signal phone information such as signal strength, new messages, battery life, active Bluetooth and Airplane mode data connections.
Page 334 Your Home screen Icon Description Icon Description Call in progress Bluetooth is on Call hold System warning Speakerphone Alarm is set Phone microphone is muted New voicemail Missed call Ringer is silenced...
Page 335 Icon Description Icon Description NFC is on Downloading data Vibrate mode Uploading data GPS is acquiring Battery fully charged Receiving location data from Battery is charging Phone is connected to PC via Data is syncing USB cable...
Page 336 Your Home screen Icon Description Icon Description New Gmail Portable Wi-Fi hotspot is active Both USB tethering and portable New Google Talk message hotspot are active New message Song is playing USB tethering is active...
Page 337: Onscreen Keyboard
Onscreen keyboard Tap to switch to the numbers and symbols keyboard. You can also touch and hold You can enter text using the onscreen this tab to view the Settings menu. keyboard. The onscreen keyboard appears automatically on the screen when you need to Tap to enter a space.
Page 338 Your Home screen "a" key until the zoom-in key grows bigger and displays characters from different languages. Then select the special character you want.
Page 339: Google Account Set Up
Google account set up When you first turn on your phone, you have touch Sign in. the opportunity to activate the network, to sign Once you have set up your Google account into your Google Account and how you want to on your phone, your phone automatically use some Google services.
Page 340: Connecting To Networks And Devices
Connecting to Networks and Devices Wi-Fi Turn off Wi-Fi when you're not using it to extend the life of your battery. With Wi-Fi, you can use high-speed Internet access within the coverage of the wireless NOTE: If you are out of the Wi-Fi access point [WAP].
Page 341: Bluetooth
Tap Wi-Fi menu again to see a list of active Bluetooth and in-range Wi-Fi networks. You can use Bluetooth to send data by running • Secured networks are indicated by a lock a corresponding application as on most other icon. mobile phones.
Page 342 Connecting to Networks and Devices Turning on Bluetooth and pairing up your TIP! With LG-P895, you can enjoy phone with a Bluetooth device Bluetooth high speed. If the device You must pair your device with another device you want to share files which also before you connect to it.
Page 343: Sharing Your Phone's Data Connection
again. Sharing your phone's data Choose the device you want to pair up with connection from the list. USB tethering and portable Wi-Fi hotspot are Once the paring is successful, your device will great features when there are no wireless connect to the device.
Page 344 Connecting to Networks and Devices bar and as an ongoing notification in the TIP! If your computer is running notifications drawer. Windows 7 or a recent distribution For the latest information about tethering of some flavours of Linux (such as and portable hotspots, including supported Ubuntu), you don't usually need to operating systems and other details, visit http://...
Page 345: To Rename Or Secure Your Portable Hotspot
To rename or secure your will open. • You can change the network SSID (name) portable hotspot that other computers or devices see when You can change the name of your phone's scanning for Wi-Fi networks. Wi-Fi network name (SSID) and secure its Wi-Fi •...
Page 346: Using The Wi-Fi Cast
Connecting to Networks and Devices hotspot with a computer or other device. Using the Wi-Fi Cast You can set Open in the Security menu to You can share your music, picture and video remove security from your Wi-Fi network. content between users who use Android Touch Save.
Page 347: Enabling Wi-Fi Direct To Share Through Smartshare
Select a device to connect from the Touch > Apps tab > Settings > More scanned device list. from the WIRELESS & NETWORKS > Wi-Fi Touch Connect. Direct Select a device to connect from the Enabling Wi-Fi Direct to share scanned device list.
Page 348: Using Smartshare
Connecting to Networks and Devices Using SmartShare NOTE: When your phone becomes SmartShare uses DLNA (Digital Living Network a group owner, it will consume Alliance) technology to share digital content more battery power than when it is a client. Wi-Fi Direct connection through a wireless network.
Page 349 • Touch Always accept request if you would To control your renderer devices like to automatically accept sharing requests Let your renderer device (e.g., TV) play from other devices. multimedia contents from your remote content • Touch Receive files if you would like to library (e.g., PC).
Page 350 Connecting to Networks and Devices You can browse the content library. : Need to be connected network Touch and hold a content thumbnail and : Select the device on network ﬂ ick them to the top area with your ﬁ nger or : Currently, the content is being shared touch the Menu Key >...
Page 351 To download contents from the remote NOTICE: Check that your device is content library connected with your home network Touch > Apps tab > SmartShare using Wi-Fi connection to use this Touch the From button and select the application. device of the remote content library. Some DLNA enabled devices (e.g.
Page 352 Connecting to Networks and Devices To upload contents from the remote content Select the device of the remote content library library to be uploaded. NOTE: Make sure that the internal NOTICE: Some DLNA enabled storage is correctly mounted and the devices do not support the DMS Receive files option in the Settings upload functionality and will not...
Page 353: Calls
Calls Making a call Calling your contacts Touch to open the keypad. Touch to open your contacts. Enter the number using the keypad. To Scroll through the contact list or enter the delete a digit, touch the ﬁ rst few letters of the contact you want to call by touching Search contacts.
Page 354: Adjusting Call Volume
Calls Hold and slide the Quick msg icon from the Making a second call bottom if you want to send a message. During your ﬁ rst call, touch Menu > Add call and dial the number. Also, you can TIP! Quick msg go recent dialled list by touching or can...
Page 355: Viewing Your Call Logs
Home Key and slide the notiﬁ cation bar TIP! Touch any call log entry to view down and select End call icon the date, time and duration of the call. NOTE: You are charged for each call you make. TIP! Press the Menu key, then touch Delete all to delete all the recorded Viewing your call logs...
Page 356 Calls Voicemail settings – If you are using your On the home screen, touch carrier’s voicemail service, this option allows Touch menu. you to enter the voicemail number to use for Tap Call settings and choose the options listening to and managing your voicemail. that you want to adjust.
Page 357 Call forwarding – Choose whether to divert all Additional settings – This lets you change the calls, when the line is busy, when there is no following settings: answer or when you have no signal. Caller ID: Choose whether to display your Call barring –...
Page 358: Contacts
Contacts Add contacts to your phone and synchronise Contacts > Create new contact. them with the contacts in your Google account If you want to add a picture to the new or other accounts that support contact syncing. contact, touch the image area. Choose from Take photo or Select from Searching for a contact Gallery.
Page 359: Moving Contacts From Your Old Device To Your New Device
PC using a PC sync Removing a contact from your favourites program. list Install "LG PC Suite" on the PC ﬁ rst. Run the Touch to open your contacts. program and connect your Android mobile...
Page 360 A Field mapping popup to link the contacts in your device and new contacts data will appear. If there is a conﬂ ict between the data in your PC contacts and device contacts, make the necessary selections or modiﬁ cations in LG PC Suite. Click OK.
Page 361: Messaging
Messaging Your LG-P895 combines SMS and MMS into NOTE: You will be charged for a text one intuitive, easy-to-use menu. message for every person you send the message to. Sending a message Touch Enter message ﬁ eld and start to...
Page 362: Threaded Box
Messaging Touch Send to send your message. WARNING: If an image, Responses appear on the screen. As you video or audio file is added to an view and send additional messages, a SMS message, it is automatically message thread is created. converted into an MMS message and you are charged accordingly.
Page 363: Using Smilies
When writing a new message, press the Menu key, then choose Insert smiley. Changing your message settings Your LG-P895 message settings are predefined, so you can send messages immediately. You can change the settings based on your preferences. Touch Messaging icon on the home screen,...
Page 364: E-Mail
E-mail You can use the Email application to read To add another email account: emails from services like Gmail. The Email • Touch > Apps tab > E-mail > in the application supports the following account account screen, touch > Add account types: POP3, IMAP and Exchange.
Page 365: Email Account Screen
account > touch an account you want to – Touch the folder icon to open the delete > Delete > OK account folders. Email account screen TIP! You can touch an account to view its Inbox. If you long-press an account from the list of email accounts, you can select The account from which you send email by the desired option in the pop-up...
Page 366: Working With Account Folders
E-mail Working with account folders Contacts. Separate multiple addresses with semicolon. Each account has an Inbox, Outbox, Sent Touch Cc/Bcc ﬁ eld to add Cc/Bcc and Touch and Drafts folder. Depending on the features to attach ﬁ les if required. supported by your account's service provider, Enter the text of the message.
Page 367 TIP! When a new email arrives in the inbox, you will receive a notification by sound or vibration. Tap the email notification to stop notifications.
Page 368: Camera
Camera Getting to know the viewfinder Swap camera – Switch between the rear–facing camera lens and the front–facing camera lens. Cheese shutter – Say Cheese when you get ready to take a photo. Time catch shot – Touch this icon to capture the missing moment before pressing the shutter.
Page 369: Taking A Quick Photo
Taking a quick photo Touch to share your photo via Bluetooth, E-mail, Gmail, Google+, Memo, Open the Camera application. Messaging, Picasa and Social+. Hold the phone, point the lens towards the subject you want to photograph. TIP! If you have an SNS account Touch the screen and a focus box will and set it up on your phone, you appear in the viewﬁ...
Page 370: Using The Advanced Settings
Camera Move – Touch to move the photo to other Improves colour qualities in different place. lighting conditions. Rename – Touch to edit the name of the Applies artistic effects to the pictures. selected picture. Applies the additional options for Rotate left/right –...
Page 371 – Touch if you want to change the – This defines and controls the amount of viewfinder menu. sunlight entering the photo. – Switch between the rear–facing camera – Focuses on the specific spot. lens and the front–facing camera lens. –...
Page 372 Camera ISO, the more sensitive the camera is. This is geotagging, you can see the pictures displayed useful in darker conditions when you cannot on a map. use the flash. NOTE: This function is only available – Improves colour qualities in different when GPS is active.
Page 373 TIP! When you exit the camera, some settings return to their defaults, such as white balance, colour tone, timer and shot mode. Check these before you take your next photo. TIP! The Settings menu is superimposed over the viewfinder so, when you change elements of the photo colour or quality, you see a preview of the image change behind the Settings menu.
Page 374: Video Camera
Video camera Getting to know the viewfinder Swap camera – Switch between the rear–facing camera lens and the front-facing camera lens. Zoom – Zoom in or out. Brightness – This defines and controls the amount of sunlight entering the video. Live effect –...
Page 375: Shooting A Quick Video
Shooting a quick video Tip! Open the camera application and touch – Touch to capture image during video mode button. recording a video. The video camera viewﬁ nder appears on Touch on the screen to stop recording. the screen. Holding the phone, point the lens towards After shooting a video the subject you want to capture in your Your captured video will appear on the Gallery.
Page 376: Using The Advanced Settings
Video camera Using the advanced settings Touch to delete the video you just made. Confirm by touching OK. The viewfinder Using the viewfinder, touch to open all the reappears. advanced options. Touch to open the options. – Touch if you want to change the Move –...
Page 377: Adjusting The Volume When Viewing A Video
– Allows you to turn on the flash when – Auto review automatically shows you taking a video in dark conditions. the video you just recorded. – Touch to set the size (in pixels) of the – Restore all video camera default video you are recording.
Page 378: Video Wiz
Video Wiz You can make your own movie using your images/video and music. From the Home Screen, touch the Apps Key > Video Wiz . Select the desired options to create a movie.
Page 379 then touch Delete selected (or Delete all). Add Media – Touch this icon add Add Style – Touch this icon to select the images and/or video to your movie. desired movie style. • Touch Images to add images, then touch •...
Page 380 Video Wiz • Swipe left and right to select the footage Preview – Touch this icon to play your to edit. movie. • Touch the Overlay Text icon to insert Help – Touch this icon to view text. information on how to use the Video Wiz •...
Page 381: Multimedia
Touch to pause playback a video. Video Player Touch to resume playback a video. Your LG-P895 has a built-in video player that lets you play all your favourite videos. To access Touch to go 10 seconds forward. the video player, Touch >...
Page 382: Gallery
Multimedia Touch to set Dolby audio effect Touch the direct list icon to see the when connected with headset jack. list of videos. Touch Speed controller icon and To change the volume while watching video, drag the progress bar to control press the up and down volume keys on the playback speed.
Page 383: Music Player
> Apps tab > Music Player. USB mass storage devices Touch Songs. Connect the LG-P895 to a PC using a USB Select the song you want to play. cable. If you haven't installed LG Android Platform Touch to pause playback.
Page 384 Multimedia Touch to resume playback. Touch to set shuffle mode. Touch to skip to the next track in the Touch to see the current playlist. album, playlist. Touch to see lyrics. This option is on Touch to go back to the beginning only if the song includes the lyrics.
Page 385: Lg Tag
What is LG Tag+ protected by international treaties and national copyright laws. LG Tag+ allows easy saving and loading to NFC Therefore, it may be necessary to tag, which can be customized to suit certain obtain permission or a licence to environments.
Page 386: Media Home
Multimedia Using Tag+ reading You can change the settings based on your preferences. When touching the set tag, mode will be activated right away. Tip! Media Home Once you connect your device to a TV or monitor via a MHL cable, Using media home media home apps will be launch Touch...
Page 387: Notebook
Notebook With Notebook application, you can manage Getting to know the Notebook and personalize a wide variety of information. Making a note Touch > Apps tab > Notebook. Touch New note to create a new note. Select the desired mode(Cover, Title, Paper, Paper colour) and OK.
Page 388 Notebook – Select the Read only or edit mode. – Save the note with the current screen. – Undo or Redo. – Select to lock or unlock the Front key. – Tap this button to write. – Tap this button to enlarge the input –...
Page 389: Lg Smartworld
LG SmartWorld LG SmartWorld offers an assortment of exciting Download the content you want. content - games, applications, wallpaper and ringtones - giving LG phone users the chance NOTE: What if there is no icon? to enjoy richer "Mobile Life" experiences.
Page 390: How To Use Lg Smartworld
LG SmartWorld How to use LG SmartWorld Settings – Set Profile and Display. Sign in – Set your ID and Password. • Participate in monthly LG SmartWorld • Try other useful functions as well. (Content promotions. Detail screen) – Search Content.
Page 391: Utilities
Menu key and select Settings. You can adjust the below options: Alarm in silent After you set the alarm, the LG-P895 lets mode, Alarm volume, Side button you know how much time is left before the behavior and Puzzle lock option.
Page 392: Adding An Event To Your Calendar
Utilities Touch Event name then enter the event For more complex calculations, touch name. select the Advanced panel, then choose sin, cos, tan, log and so on. Touch Location and enter the location. Check the date and enter the time you want To check history tap the icon your event to start and ﬁ...
Page 393: Tasks
Tasks Polaris Office This task can be synchronized with MS Polaris Office is a professional mobile office Exchange account. You can create task, revise solution that lets users conveniently view it and delete it in MS outlook or MS Office various types of office documents, including Outlook Web Access.
Page 394: Fileshare
Utilities Viewing files like to share. Choose from Images, Videos, Music and Document. Mobile users can now easily view a wide variety of file types, including Microsoft Office Backup documents and Adobe PDF, right on their About backing up and restoring smart mobile devices.
Page 395 • To perform a manual backup of your smart smart phones, other S/W version or OS. And phone data. so, when you buy the new LG smart phone, you • To schedule automatic backups of your can back up the current LG-P895 smart phone smart phone data.
Page 396: Back Up Your Smart Phone Data
Utilities Back up your smart phone Scheduling automatic data backups Touch > Apps tab > and then select You can also enable automatic backups of Backup > Backup > Internal Storage. the data on your smart phone according to your schedule setting. To do this, complete the Touch the Add new to enter a name for following steps: your backup ﬁ...
Page 397: Restoring Smart Phone Data
Select the check box next to the data you Touch > Apps tab > and then select want to back up, and then select Continue Backup > Restore > Internal Storage. to ﬁ nish the schedule set. On the Restore screen, select a backup ﬁ le that contains the data you want to restore.
Page 398 Utilities When all selected ﬁ les restored, you will Press the Menu from the Backup screen, see the message ‘Done’ and select Yes to and select Settings > Security > Enable restart the phone. encryption and select the check box. To restore synchronised organizer data, you must have an NOTE: activation password.
Page 399 NOTE: You can also enable automatic delete old backups and only keep the most recent backup. Press the Menu from the Backup screen, and select Settings > Scheduled backup > Auto delete old backups to select the number of scheduled backups to keep.
Page 400: The Web
The web Internet Using the web toolbar Browser gives you a fast, full-colour world Touch to go back a page. of games, music, news, sport, entertainment Touch to go forward a page, to the page and much more, right on your mobile phone. you connected to after the current one.
Page 401: Using Options
Using options Request desktop site – Allows you to view the web page as desktop. Press to view options. Save for offline reading – Save current page Refresh – Update the current web page. to read it during offline. Save to bookmarks – Add the current web Brightness –...
Page 402: Settings
MAC filters, Here, you can manage Wi-Fi and Bluetooth. You you may need to enter the MAC can also set up mobile networks and switch to address of your LG-P895 into the airplane mode. router. < Wi-Fi >...
Page 403 < Call > the portable Wi-Fi hotspot settings. You can configure phone call settings such NFC – Your LG-P895 is NFC-enabled mobile as call forwarding and other special features phone. NFC (Near Field Communication) is a offered by your carrier.
Page 404 Settings centimeters. You can share your contents with Using NFC: To use NFC, make sure your a NFC tag or another NFC support device via device is switched on and activate the NFC, if simple touch with your device. If you touch a disabled.
Page 405: Device
VPN – Displays the list of Virtual Private DEVICE Networks (VPNs) that you've previously < Sound > configured. Allows you to add different types Sound profile – You can choose the Sound, of VPN. Vibrate only or Silent. Mobile networks – Set options for data Volumes –...
Page 406 Settings Ringtone with vibration – Vibration feedback unlocking the screen. for calls and notifications. Vibrate on touch – Allows you to set the Quiet time – Set times to turn off all sounds vibration feedback for phone screen touch. except alarm and media. <...
Page 407 Aspect ratio correction – Change the < Lock screen > resolution size of downloaded applications to fit Select screen lock – Set a screen lock type the screen size. to secure your phone. Opens a set of screens Front key light – Set the front key light that guide you through drawing a screen unlock duration.
Page 408 Settings Owner info – Show owner info on lock screen. Snooze or stop alarm – Flip device to snooze or stop alarm. Lock timer – Set the lock time after screen timeout. Pause video – Flip device to pause playing video.
Page 409: Personal
< Apps > determines your approximate location using Wi-Fi and mobile networks. When you select You can view and manage the applications. this option, you're asked whether you consent PERSONAL to allowing Google to use your location when providing these services. <...
Page 410 Settings card lock or change the Micro-USIM PIN. < Language & input > Password typing visible – Show last Use the Language & input settings to select character of the hidden password as you type. the language for the text on your phone and for configuring the on-screen keyboard, including Phone administrators –...
Page 411: System
Automatic restore – Set to restore your set your own time and time zone rather than settings and application data when the obtaining the current time from the mobile applications are reinstalled on your device. network. Factory data reset – Reset your settings to <...
Page 412: Phone Software Update
PC are available through Internet USB, Bluetooth or Wi-Fi connection. For more information about using this function, PC Suite – Check mark this to use LG PC please visit http://update.lgmobile.com or Suite with Wi-Fi connection. http://www.lg.com/common/index.jsp select country and language.
Page 413 LG reserves the right to a service centre. This feature will only be make firmware updates available available if and when LG makes a newer only for selected models at its own firmware version available for your device. discretion and does not guarantee...
Page 414 Settings LG makes a newer firmware version available NOTE: Your personal data from for your device. internal phone storage—including First, you can check the software version on information about your Google your mobile phone: Settings > About phone > account and any other accounts, your system/application data Software update >...
Page 415: Divx Hd
ABOUT DIVX VIDEO-ON-DEMAND: This DivX NOTE: This feature is dependent on ® Certified device must be registered in order to your network service provider, region play purchased DivX Video-on-Demand (VOD) and country. movies. To obtain your registration code, locate the DivX VOD section in your device setup DivX HD menu.
Page 416: Dts
Settings Dolby Mobile Manufactured under license from Dolby Manufactured under license under Laboratories. Dolby and the double-D U.S. Patent Nos: 5,956,674; 5,974,380; symbol are trademarks of Dolby 6,487,535 & other U.S. and worldwide patents Laboratories. issued & pending. DTS, the Symbol, & DTS and the Symbol together are registered trademarks &...
Page 417: Lg On-Screen Phone
LG On-Screen Phone On-Screen Phone allows you to view your Minimize the On-Screen Phone window. mobile phone screen from a PC via a USB or On-Screen Phone features Bluetooth connection. You can also control your mobile phone from your PC, using the mouse •...
Page 418: How To Install On-Screen Phone On Your Pc
On-Screen Phone Go to Support > Mobile Phone Support window. The files sent are stored in internal > Select the Model (LG-P895) > Click OSP SD card. ( On-Screen Phone ) to download. You can...
Page 419: Accessories
Accessories These accessories are available for use with the LG-P895. (Items described below may be optional.) Travel adaptor Stereo Micro- headset USIM Slot Data cable User Guide LG Tag+ Connect your Learn more LG-P895 and about your LG-P895. Rubberdium™...
Page 420 Rubberdium Pen. Please use your finger directly. WARNING: Do not touch strongly and rub such as sharp edges NOTE: • Always use genuine LG accessories. • Failure to do this may void your warranty. • Accessories may vary in different regions.
Page 421: Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting This chapter lists some problems you might encounter while using your phone. Some problems require you to call your service provider, but most are easy to fix yourself. Message Possible causes Possible corrective measures Micro- There is no Micro-USIM Make sure that the Micro-USIM card is USIM card in the phone or it is...
Page 422 Troubleshooting Message Possible causes Possible corrective measures Signal is weak or you're Move towards a window or into an outside the carrier open area. Check the network operator network. coverage map. network connection/ Check whether the Micro-USIM card is more than 6~12 months old. If so, Losing Operator applied new change your Micro-USIM at your network...
Page 423 Message Possible causes Possible corrective measures To change a security code, you will need to confirm the new code by Codes do If you forget the code, contact your re-entering it. not match service provider. The two codes you have entered do not match.
Page 424 Troubleshooting Message Possible causes Possible corrective measures Dialling error New network not authorised. New Micro-USIM card Calls not Check for new restrictions. inserted. available Pre-paid charge limit Contact service provider or reset limit reached. with PIN2. On/Off key pressed too Press the On/Off key down for at least Phone briefly.
Page 425 Make sure phone is charging at a normal hot or cold. temperature. Check the charger and connection to the Charging Contact problem phone. error No voltage Plug the charger into a different socket. Charger defective Replace charger. Wrong charger Only use original LG accessories.
Page 426 Troubleshooting Message Possible causes Possible corrective measures Number The Fixed dialling number Check the Settings menu and turn the function is on. function off. permitted Impossible to receive / send Memory full Delete some messages from the phone. SMS & picture Files not Check the file formats that can be...
Page 427 Message Possible causes Possible corrective measures screen If you use any protection tape or case, does not check to see if it has covered the area turn on Proximity sensor problem around the proximity sensor. Make sure when I that the area around the proximity sensor receive a is clean.
Page 428 Troubleshooting Message Possible causes Possible corrective measures Hang up Intermittent software Try to perform a software update via the or freeze problem website.

LG P895 User Manual

Quick Links

Related Manuals for LG P895

Summary of Contents for LG P895

Table of Contents